Home

Image for Windows User Manual

1. The Global Geometry Settings are used to control the geometry options for the target drive of copy and restore operations These global options offer a convenient way to control how the program sets up the target drive They only apply to interactive sessions Command line restores always require specific options on the command line Disabled Check this box to disable the global geometry settings and revert to using program defaults or drive specific overrides equivalent to versions prior to 2 52 Image for Windows User Manual Page 40 of 227 Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries This option provides a convenient way to enable 1MiB partition alignment for all drives drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors This is popular with users of SSD type drives It is the equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align on 1MiB Boundaries Align MBR Ending HS Align MBR HS when Truncated and disabling Align on End Align MBR for BIOS Auto Mode This option is enabled by default to prevent problems with unaligned partitions on systems with their BIOS using Auto Mode Many newer systems use auto mode by default and some even don t have an option to turn it off This is equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align MBR Ending HS and Align MBR HS when Truncated Assume Same Target System Enable this option to prevent problems where users
2. f N A Use this option to specify the target drive letter path and file name for a backup file f x Milename f x mypath filename f x my path file name Or f d p ilename f d p mypath filename f d p my path filename f ntsig p mypath filename f GUID p mypath filename x is target drive letter mypath or my path is path to filename filename is target file name for image Or Specify target device partition path and file name d is target hard drive number p is target partition ID hex or decimal notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID mypath or my path is path to filename filename is target file name for image Device modifiers may be used as needed When used they must be placed after the f and before the target hard drive number w Windows Device o Optical drive when you combine this option with the option mentioned above this option must come last v Virtual drive Whether using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of quotes o can be use with a u f ands Image for Windows User Manual Page 154 of 227 The above options are required when you perform a backup using Image for Windows from the command line In Table 4 you find a list of the optional backup parameters you can use when you run Image for Windows from the comma
3. pase ntsig p mypath bkup d is source hard drive number base GUID p mypath bkup p is source partition ID hex or decimal notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the base and before the source hard drive number w Windows device o Optical drive when you combine this option with the option mentioned above this option must come last Whether using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of quotes sch path N A Use this parameter to specify the search paths Image for Windows uses when looking for base images in the backup chain path can use the d p path format to specify the drive and partition id This option can be used multiple times to specify multiple search paths e g when the images in the backup chain are not all stored in the same folder Examples commands should be on one line imagew v f E Backups Win8System Inc D sch E Backups sch E Backups Archive imagew v f wl 0x2 Images WinXP Drive Inc E sch wl 0x2 Images sch wl1 0x2 Images Full Default if omitted Image for Windows searches only the folder of the specified image for base images in the backup chain pw mypassword or pw m
4. By checking the Multi File checkbox Image for Windows will create a Multiple File Set backup This type of backup is comprised of one image for every individual partition that Image for Windows backs up Image for Windows names the first file created for the first image set lt name gt _0 TBI where lt name gt is a character string you supply Image for Windows adds _0 to identify the image file set If Image for Windows creates additional files for the same image set they will be named lt name gt _0 1 lt name gt _0 2 lt name gt _0 3 and so on Image for Windows names the files of the second image set i e the second partition included in the backup lt name gt _1 TBI lt name gt _1 1 lt name gt _1 2 lt name gt _1 3 and so on Image for Windows will name subsequent image sets accordingly with _2 _3 and so on appended to the file name Image for Windows User Manual Page 31 of 227 If you choose this option each file Image for Windows creates represents only a single partition and you won t be able to completely restore a drive with One menu option but will have to restore each partition separately The number of files Image for Windows will create for each image set depends on the size of the corresponding partition and the File Size setting you choose in a later step Virtual Drives and Image for Windows You can use Image for Windows to back up to or restore from a single file virtual drive In most c
5. 2 Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT128M4SSD2 Drive 4 2 73 TiB E F ST3000DM001 9YN166 J Drive 2 1 82 TiB H ST2000DM001 9YN164 Add Virtual Drive Information Compact Note If using Image for Windows outside of Windows e g TBWinRE Image for Windows User Manual Page 115 of 227 TBWinPE the drive letters shown are as assigned by the first Windows installation found on the system Click the Compact button to compact FAT FAT32 and NTFS partitions on the drive This option allows you to reduce the size required for a restore You will be prompted to confirm the compaction and then asked for the compaction value size in MiB For example if you have a 480GB drive that contains 50GB of data and requires 150GB of space to restore and you need to restore it to a 128GB drive you can compact the drive to under 128GB before imaging it and then restore it to the 128GB drive 3 Select where you want to save the backup and then click Next Select where you want to save the backup 4 Computer Simple Operations Enabled 9 Windows Drives E Data 288 07GiB Free Note If a store already exists for the drive being backed up you will not be prompted to select one the existing store will be used Note When using Image for Windows in TBWinRE or TBWinPE accessible partitions not assigned a drive letter will also be available for selection 4 The summary screen is shown Click Start to create the backup
6. When you set up a hard drive you can create logical partitions A logical partition is simply a conceptual division on the hard disk You can use different file systems in different partitions and many users partition hard disks so that they can store different operating systems or segregate data on the same hard drive If you set up different partitions so that you can use different operating and file systems you can Image for Windows User Manual Page 202 of 227 use Terabyte s BootIT Bare Metal to select the operating system in which you want to work each time you boot your computer Formatting is the process that prepares a partition on the hard disk to accept data by creating an empty file system that is organized into clusters A cluster a logical grouping of contiguous sectors is the smallest logical unit of storage that you can allocate to hold a file s data Figures 1 through 3 depict the layout of files within clusters on a hypothetical partition In each figure shown 44 clusters contain data In Figure 1 the ast cluster in use that is the one closest to the bottom right is at the very end of the partition Figure 1 The location of this last cluster at the time that you create an image determines the minimum amount of free space that must be available on the hard drive to which you intend to restore called the target drive Note If you are restoring a partition with an image created using raw mode
7. Before you make the decision concerning the type of backup you want to create read Appendix B Backup Strategies for a detailed explanation of full differential and incremental backups Creating a Full Backup You walk through a series of windows to create a full backup If you are backing up to disc media CD DVD BD be aware that Image for Windows can automatically overwrite CD RW DVD RW and BD RE media However if you wish to use DVD RW media it must be fully formatted fully blanked or brand new before being used To fully blank the DVD RW media use your burning software s full erase function The quick erase function will not work for this purpose Tip It s always a good idea to validate your backup as you create it Image for Windows User Manual Page 26 of 227 Follow these steps to create a full backup 1 Double click the Image for Windows icon on your desktop or launch the program from its program group on the Start menu If you downloaded a trial version a reminder message appears You can click OK to continue evaluating click Enter Key to record your registration key or click Buy Now to purchase Image for Windows 2 On the Image for Windows Welcome window select Backup Full i Image for Windows 2 86 Welcome to Image for Windows Please choose which operation you would like to perform at this time Operation Backup Full Backup Changes Only D Restor
8. Image for Windows User Manual Page 122 of 227 base lastfullbackup Image for Windows and Windows Services To control Windows services from within Image for Windows before and after PHYLock starts set up a file called services ins Place each service s entry on a separate line and save the file as a comma separated values CSV file You can set the following parameters in the order listed on each line Service name the name of service to control The action to take before backing up start stop pause continue none The number of milliseconds to wait before backing up a value in milliseconds that represents the maximum wait time for action completion The action to take after PHYLock starts start stop pause continue none The number of milliseconds to wait after PHYLock starts a value in milliseconds that represents the maximum wait time for action completion The action to take after completing the backup start stop pause continue none The number of milliseconds to wait after completing the backup a value in milliseconds that represents the maximum wait time for action completion For example suppose that you create a services ins file that contains the following string my service stop 30000 none start 10000 Using this information Image for Windows will stop the service named my service before backing up waiting up to 30000 milliseconds before backing up In addition Image for Windows will ta
9. new chain will be started Default if omitted Image for Windows limits each chain to six incremental backups ds DisableSettings 1 Use this option to disable access to global settings within the program The Settings button will be removed or the Settings key will be disabled depending on the interface used Default if omitted Image for Windows will allow normal access to global settings within the program bcl n BackwardsCompatibleLevel n Use this option to specify the TBI file version to use when creating a backup using the bc BackwardsCompatible option Valid values are 0 version 2 50 and 278 285 versions 2 78 through 2 85 Any value lower than 278 is considered 0 Default if omitted When bc BackwardsCompatible is used Image for Windows will create the backup using the 2 50 TBI file version iocf n lIOCacheFlags n Use this option to configure when to use small cache I O for sector I O and accessing the main image files The values are bit based and can be one of the following values or a combination of the following values added together 0 Disabled 1 Read File 2 Write File 4 Read Sectors 8 Write Sectors 16 Copy Sectors read write For example to use a small cache for reading and writing the main image files and reading sectors use the value 7 iocf 7 This option can be useful in cases where Image for Windows is slower than previous versions or there are I
10. path N A Use this parameter to specify the search paths Image for Windows uses when looking for base images in the backup chain path can use the d p path format to specify the drive and partition id This option can be used multiple times to specify multiple search paths e g when the images in the backup chain are not all stored in the same folder Examples commands should be on one line imagew b v hash base E Backups Win8System Inc C E Backups Win8System Inc D sch E Backups sch E Backups Archive imagew b v hash base w1l 0x2 Images WinXP Drive Inc D wl 0x2 Images WinXP Drive Inc E sch wl 0x2 Images sch w1 0x2 Images Full Default if omitted Image for Windows searches only the folder of the specified image for Image for Windows User Manual Page 155 of 227 base images in the backup chain fd ForceDismount 1 Use this option to force dismounting a volume partition that can t be locked for backup when PHYLock or VSS is not used Using this option will invalidate all opened handles to the volume which may result in lost data Image for Windows will attempt to lock the volume after forcing the dismount Default if omitted Normal locking without forcing a dismount occurs ro n N A Instructs Image for Windows to reboot shutdown suspend or hibernate the computer after complet
11. Image for Windows User Manual Page 81 of 227 Change Volume SN Select this option to change the file system volume serial number of copied FAT FAT32 NTFS HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2 3 4 partitions First Track Sectors This text box allows you to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive should be restored If you enter AUTO in this box the tracks needed for the EMBR will be restored If you aren t sure type AUTO in this box Image for DOS Restore Options for an Individual Partition When you restore an individual partition Image for DOS offers these options that you can set Image for DOS GUI 297e Options C Set Acti First Track Sectors et Active au AUTO write Changed Sectors Only Resize Partition C Update Boot Partition Min New Max O wite Standard MBR Code 12546 MiB o S 60929 MiB C Restore Disk Signature C Restore First Track z New Name O Validate Before Restore C Change GUID O Validate Byte for Byte ne Byte C wipe Unused Sectors Unlimited C Move to Original MBR Entry C GPT Hidden From OS C Assume Original HD CO Ignore I0 Errors Disable Auto Eject a Save Defaults Show Command Set Active If you select this option Image for DOS will make the restored partition the active partition after completing the restore operation Otherwise Image for DOS will make the restored partition active only if no other partition is active and the target d
12. This option only applies to full drive restores It allows you to change the NT Signature restored to the target drive For target GPT drives the MBR NT Signature the GPT Disk GUID and the partition GUIDs will all be changed This can be useful if you plan on having both the original and restored hard drive in the same computer at the same time otherwise Windows may detect the duplicate signature and modify it which may depending on the OS prevent the restored hard drive from booting properly Validate Before Restore If you select this option Image for DOS will validate the image file s prior to restoring them will perform internal consistency checks on the backup file s If Image for DOS encounters an error during validation Image for DOS will abort the restore operation without overwriting the partition If you select this option the overall processing time Image for DOS takes to restore the image will increase but you can restore the image with greater certainty that the restored image will be reliable Validate Byte for Byte If you select this option Image for DOS will verify that every byte in the source backup image file was written back to the drive correctly ensuring 100 accuracy This option generally increases the processing time of the overall backup operation but is advisable to use where maximum reliability is required Write Standard MBR Code If you select this option Image for DOS will install standard ma
13. This option applies when you restore a partition that had been assigned a drive letter within Windows prior to being backed up If you select this option Image for Windows will restore the disk signature associated with the source partition If you are restoring a partition that had been assigned a drive letter in Windows and you wish to keep that drive letter assignment select this option Note The source Windows drive letter assignment will only be kept if it was previously assigned on the Windows system where the restored partition is used and the drive letter is not currently in use by another partition Note The disk GUID of a target GPT drive will not be changed Default if omitted Image for Windows will use the disk signature already present in the MBR of the target drive if none exists Image for Windows will create one if necessary csig ChangeNTSig 1 When performing full drive restores this option allows you to change the NT Signature restored to the target drive For target GPT drives the MBR NT Signature the GPT Disk GUID and the partition GUIDs will all be changed This can be useful if you plan on having both the original and restored hard drive in the same computer at the same time while running Windows otherwise Windows may detect the duplicate signature and modify it which may depending on the OS prevent the restored hard drive from booting properly When restoring single or multiple partitions to a GPT drive
14. do not copy use retain or disclose any of those registration codes or serial numbers and c if you purchased packaged copies of the Software with full use rights you may return the complete package unused to your place of purchase within fifteen 15 days after purchase for a refund The exercise of any or all of the rights set forth below constitutes acceptance of all of the terms and conditions of the Agreement Where you have received a signed Agreement directly from TeraByte any discrepancy between that signed Agreement and an unsigned Agreement shall be controlled by the signed Agreement As further set forth below TeraByte Inc dba TeraByte Unlimited TeraByte and or its suppliers own the Software and its documentation which are protected under applicable copyright trade secrets and other laws The Software is licensed not sold Your rights and license to use the Software and the documentation are limited to the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Agreement 1 LICENSE a YOU MAY i Single Copy License if you paid for a single copy license use the Software on a single computer that you or your organization owns or controls Computer System as further described in 1 c below ii Multiple Copy License if you paid for a multiple copy license make and use the number of Software copies for which you paid provided that you may only use each copy of the Software as described in i above
15. dpwr DisablePowerChanges 1 Use this option to lock the power options of Image for Windows so they can t be adjusted while the operation is in progress Default if omitted Image for Windows allows power option changes login server share user password LogIn server share user password Use this option to have Image for Windows attempt to automatically login to a share ona server This would typically be needed when Windows cannot automatically login to the share for the user profile running Image for Windows Image for Windows also allows you to store an encrypted password to the registry soa clear text password is not needed When doing this it s important to use the same user profile that will attempt to login when running Image for Windows because it can only be decrypted by the user that created it Additionally a password stored using the 64 bit version of Image for Windows may not be available to the 32 bit version or vice versa see altregview for details You can also create and manage stored passwords using the Password tab in Settings Examples Store an encrypted password to the registry login ntdomain user password Delete a stored encrypted password login ntdomain user Login using encrypted password login server share ntdomain user Login using text password Login server share ntdomain user password Tip When storing a password you may want to use 10g 0 to ensure it s not logged to
16. f e backups win7full tbi Default if omitted Image for Windows does not create the hash file during a backup operation exlist filename N A IMPORTANT NOTE This option is used at your own risk Please make sure to create standard backups of important data This option allows you to specify a file which contains a list of paths and or files to exclude from the backup image The file must be ANSI text and located on the local file system FAT FAT32 and NTFS file systems are supported the option will be ignored Image for Windows User Manual Page 161 of 227 for other file systems The data of the excluded files is essentially compressed to zero When restored the files will either be deleted or truncated depending on the options selected Note that even though excluded the data will still affect the minimum restore size just as if it wasn t excluded Additionally the excluded files and folders will still show up in TBIView and TBIMount Excluded files extracted from the image using TBIView or TBIMount will be full of zeros An exception to this are very small files on NTFS the contents of those files will be intact When creating a differential or incremental backup using a base full image created with the exlist option the list from the base image will be used a new list specified for the backup will be ignored Otherwise the specified exclusion list will be used for the backup Each line in t
17. jpg gt exclude all jpg files in the root folder and all sub folders f Movies mpg gt exclude all mpg files in the Movies folder and all sub folders folders will not be deleted ISO Files Old iso gt exclude all iso files in ISO Files Old folder and all sub folders Default if omitted Image for Windows includes all files when copying the partition the page file and hibernation file will be included or excluded per their respective options WCO WriteChangedSecsOnly 1 Use this option when copying to write only the changed sectors to the target drive target will be read to compare Useful in cases where a large portion of the data is the same and it s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive e g copying partition to SSD drive Default if omitted Image for Windows will write all copied sectors normally log 0 SaveLog 0 Disables logging Default if omitted Image for Windows logs during a copy operation Image for Windows List Options Table 11 lists the List parameters you can use when you run Image for Windows from the command line There are no INI file variable equivalents for these parameters they are only valid on the command line Image for Windows User Manual Page 192 of 227 Table 11 Image for Windows List Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable L N A Use this option to indicate that you want to list the drives and partitions on the system o
18. s website In the sections that follow you find information on creating the Image for DOS boot media and using it to restore a backup Using Image for Linux is very similar so if you prefer Linux you can create the Image for Linux boot media and use it to restore For more information on either product see their respective manuals The information about using Image for Windows to restore an image follows the information about using Image for DOS So read the section appropriate to your situation Before you dive into restoring an image consider the size of the target location where you plan restore the image The target must be large enough to accommodate the data from the source partition The minimum amount of space Image needs to restore an image in the target location equals the amount of space encompassed from the beginning of the source partition to the last used area of the source partition For example suppose that the source partition had 2 GB of data and the last part of that data ended 15 GB from the beginning of the source partition In this case the target area needs to be at least 15 GB in size regardless of the overall size of the source partition If the target is larger than the source partition there will be an area of free space left over unless you use the Resize Partition or Resize After Restore option or perform the restore via command line using the X parameter as explained later in this man
19. the entire drive is wiped including all gaps between any Image for Windows User Manual Page 111 of 227 partitions Using this option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and copy to it ina single operation Omit Page File Data Selected by default this option eliminates page file data from the copy process Omit Hibernation Data Selected by default this option eliminates hibernation data from the copy process Move to Original MBR Entry If you select this option Image for Windows will move the partition table entry of the copied partition to the same location in the master partition table as it had on the source drive Image for Windows will also move the existing partition table entry to another location rather than overwrite it You may want to enable this option if you use an environment that tracks master partition table entries such as Linux GPT Hidden From OS Use this option when copying to a GPT drive to indicate that the operating system being copied will not see the destination drive as GPT when booted For example an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the OxEE placeholder partition is missing from the MBR Using this option prevents Image for Windows from using GPT specific fix up information on the drive after the copy completes Assume Original HD If you select this option which mainly applies to Linux partitions Image for Windows will keep references to the source hard drive number intact within th
20. the original combined files will be deleted and a hash file will be created for the new backup file The command should be on one line imagew combine f E Backups Win7 Base3 base E Backups Win7 Inc 3 del hash Restoring Win7 Base3 would be the same as if you restored Win7 Inc 3 Since the files Win7 Full through Win7 Inc 3 were deleted the remaining incremental files Win7 Inc 4 amp Win7 Inc 5 are now unusable f N A Use this option to specify the target drive letter path and file name for the combined backup file f x filename x is target drive letter f x mypath filename mypath or my path is path to filename f x my path file name filename is target file name for image Or Or f d p filename Specify target device partition path and file name f d p mypath filename f d p my path filename d is target hard drive number p is target partition ID hex or decimal notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID mypath or my path is path to filename f ntsig p mypath filename f GUID p mypath filename filename is target file name for image Device modifiers may be used as needed When used they must be placed after the f and before the target hard drive number w Windows Device o Optical drive when you combine this option with the option mentioned above this option must come last v Virtual drive Wheth
21. 2 1 82 TiB H ST2000DM001 9YN164 Add Virtual Drive Information Compact Click the Compact button to compact FAT FAT32 and NTFS partitions on the drive This option allows you to reduce the size required for a restore You will be prompted to confirm the compaction and then asked for the compaction value size in MiB For example if you have a 480GB drive that contains 50GB of data and requires 150GB of space to restore and you need to restore it to a 128GB drive you can compact the drive to under 128GB before imaging it and then restore it to the 128GB drive 3 Select the drive you want to copy to and click Next 4 Ifthe selected destination drive is not large enough but the source data can be compacted to fit a warning will appear Click Yes to continue and compact the source data or No to select a different drive 5 If the selected destination drive has existing partitions a warning will appear showing the drive and the partitions that will be deleted Click Yes to continue if everything looks correct 6 The summary screen is shown Click Start to copy the drive Deploying Your Image When you deploy an image you restore it to a number of computers in an organization Therefore the information in this section does not apply to most home users Image for Windows does not change the SID of Windows NT 2000 XP 2003 Vista or Windows 7 systems If you are using Image for Windows for deployment purposes and want to change
22. 2 Click Next The License Agreement window appears Read the Image for Windows license agreement and if you accept it select the I accept the agreement option button iS Setup Image for Windows V2 License Agreement Please read the following important information before continuing Please read the following License Agreement You must accept the terms of this agreement before continuing with the installation Full Use License Image for Windows License Agreement End User License Revised April 1 2011 PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE UPGRADING COPYING INSTALLING OR USING THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE PROGRAM the Software THIS AGREEMENT SETS FORTH THE STANDARD FULL USE LICENSE FOR USE NF THE SOFTWARF ON YOIIR COMBIITFR SYSTFM IN ORNFA TN IISF THE If installing Image for Windows for the first time or after Image for Windows has been uninstalled proceed to Step 3 If you are updating an existing installation of Image for Windows and it was installed using the Simple option proceed to Step 9 Otherwise proceed to Step 5 3 Click Next The Mode Selection window appears Image for Windows can operate in simple or traditional mode Select the operating mode you wish to use the mode can be changed at any time in program settings Selecting Simple will enable Simple Operations mode This allows Image for Windows to automatically handle most options for you Backup
23. 227 Note For detailed steps to restore a backup see the section Using Image for Windows to Restore an Image on Page 85 1 2 Boot your computer using the Image for DOS boot disk you can create using the steps in the section QuickStart Creating a Recovery Boot Disc or using the BartPE boot disk you can create using the steps in the section Using Image for Windows in BartPE On the Image for DOS main menu select Restore Normal Tip If you select Restore Automatic Image for DOS will try to select for you the target location and the options you would ordinarily select in Steps 5 and 6 3 Select the source location that contains the backup image file that you want to restore Select the backup image file you want to restore Select the target location that you want Image for Windows to overwrite with the information contained in the backup image file Set restore options For details on available restore options when you are restoring an entire drive see the section Image for DOS Restore Options for an Entire Drive on Page 78 For details on available restore options when you are restoring an individual partition see the section Image for DOS Restore Options for an Individual Partition on Page 82 QuickStart Validating an Image You can validate a backup as you create it or if you don t have time to validate it when you create it you can
24. Copy operations are available in this mode To use Simple Operations mode enable the Simple Operations option in Settings Backups are saved to a store on the destination drive e g E TeraByte_TBI_Backups The storage area is automatically maintained and files are deleted as needed when it runs out of free space Image for Windows User Manual Page 114 of 227 You can run TBWinPE RE Builder to create the TBWinRE boot media by clicking the Create a TBWinRE Boot Disk button The TBWinRE boot media can be used to restore the Windows drive or partition restoring the Windows partitions while it s running is not possible T Image for Windows x64 2 98 x Welcome to Image for Windows Please choose which operation you would like to perform at this time Operation Backup this computer to an alternate drive O Restore a backup to this computer O Validate a previous backup to check its integrity TeraByte Unlimited Copy a hard drive to another hard drive Create a TBWinRE Boot Disk Settings lt lt Previous Next gt gt Cancel Creating a Backup To create a backup of a drive you simply choose which physical drive you want to back up and if needed which drive you want to save to 1 Select Backup this computer to an alternate drive on the main window and click Next 2 Select the drive you wish to back up and then click Next Select the drive to backup 4 Computer Simple Operations Enabled
25. Default if omitted PHYLock uses a normal memory allocation pldcs n PHYLockDiskCacheSize n Use this option to set the size in MiB of the disk cache Image for Windows should use n should be a positive integer e g 600 1024 etc between 1 and 4095 You must also use pldisk for pldcs to have any effect Default if omitted Image for Windows uses 600 MiB for the disk cache size plwft n PHYLockWaitTime n Use this option to set the amount of time in milliseconds ms during which writes to the source drive will prevent PHYLock from becoming enabled Setting this parameter helps ensure that file truncation and or corruption does not occur Keep this value above 1250 Default if omitted Image for Windows uses 4250 ms plmwt n PHYLockMaxWaitTime n Use this option to set the maximum amount of time in minutes that PHYLock will wait before it enables You can use this option to prevent frequent disk writes from interfering with the start of a backup operation Setting a value of 0 will instruct PHYLock to wait indefinitely Default if omitted PHYLock will wait indefinitely until the wait time is satisfied or you cancel the operation plcs n PHYLockCacheSize n Use this option to set the size in kibibytes of the memory cache Image for Windows should use for PHYLock n should be a positive integer e g 2048 4096 etc You should not use a value below 2048 for this setting Default if omitted PHY
26. General Geometry PHYLocWVSS Scheduled Tasks Password _ Stored Passwords Add Password Names el Password Information Stored passwords can be used with the email or login password Endose the name between and when using them e g StoredName It is important to note that they are only valid when running under the same platform and user account that created them To run the application as a particular user hold down the shift key while right dicking the program icon and choose Run as different user or similar depending on your version of Windows Use the fields and button above to add a new password to the list Use the delete key on your keyboard to delete the selected password from the list Use the Password tab to manage your stored passwords Stored passwords are saved encrypted in the registry and can be used with the email or login password so clear text passwords are not needed Enclose the name between and when using them e g StoredName It s important to note that they are only valid when running under the same user account that created them Additionally a password stored using the 64 bit version of Image for Windows may not be available to the 32 bit version or vice versa see the command line option altregview for details To run the application as a particular user hold down the shift key while right clicking the program icon and choose Run as diff
27. INI Variable Iv N A Use this option to indicate that you want to validate an image file Also required CDn or a path name as described below to identify the location of the backup image you want to validate f N A Use this option to specify the target drive letter path and file name for a backup file It can also be used to connect to a multicast server f x Milename f x mypath filename f x my path file name Or f d p Milename f d p mypath filename f d p my path filename f ntsig p mypath filename f GUID p mypath filename x is target drive letter mypath or my path is path to filename filename is target file name for image Or Specify target device partition path and file name d is target hard drive number p is target partition ID hex or decimal notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID mypath or my path is path to filename filename is target file name for image Device modifiers may be used as needed When used they must be placed after the f and before the target hard drive number w Windows device Image for Windows User Manual Page 178 of 227 o Optical drive when you combine this option with the option mentioned above this option must come last Whether using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of quot
28. Image for Windows User Manual Page 133 of 227 ifw log and quit if you don t need the user interface Default if omitted Image for Windows does not attempt to manually login to a share plur PHYLockUseReg 1 Use this option to obtain PHYLock settings from the registry instead of using those stored in the ifw ini file and or set using environment variables This option is enabled by default Note PHYLock settings in the registry may be stored separately for the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of Image for Windows see altregview for details For example to change a PHYLock setting in both versions you may need to run each version and make the setting change Default if omitted PHYLock uses INI and or environment variables altregview n N A Use this option to specify the registry location to use for program settings in 64 bit versions of Windows This option has no effect when used on 32 bit versions of Windows By default certain program settings e g PHYLock Passwords ExternVars are saved in the section of the registry that corresponds to the version 32 bit or 64 bit being run e g passwords saved by the 32 bit version of Image for Windows are not accessible by the 64 bit version Starting with Image for Windows 2 94 clean installations on 64 bit versions of Windows will use the 64 bit registry for settings Prior installations will continue to use legacy mode unless changed by using this option Use one of t
29. In such case you shall immediately obtain the appropriate end user license b LIMITED DISTRIBUTION LICENSE i IF YOU ARE AN INDIVIDUAL YOU MAY distribute copies of the Evaluation Software to your friends or associates provided that you charge no fees nor request any donations for this service and that you convey only a complete and unaltered copy of the original Evaluation Software files in the exact form that they were downloaded from www terabyteunlimited com ii ALL OTHER DISTRIBUTION is allowed only under the terms set forth by TeraByte if any at the www terabyteunlimited com web site TeraByte may at its sole discretion append a data record to the distribution files for the Evaluation Software in which event such data record shall be automatically incorporated by reference Any distribution satisfying all of the distribution requirements expressed at the web site or in that data record if any is hereby authorized all other distribution requires TeraByte s advance written approval iii Each individual and each vendor wishing to distribute the Evaluation Software package must independently satisfy all terms of the limited distribution license iv You may make as many copies of this Evaluation Software as you need for purposes of the limited distribution permitted in this Agreement Image for Windows User Manual Page 221 of 227 v TERABYTE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO RETRACT OR CHANGE ANY OR ALL OF THE ABOVE DISTRIBUTION
30. Indude TBIView Indude TBIMount Include TeraByte OSD Tool Lo oe 3 Ifyou are a registered user of Image for Windows use the Product Key section to supply your registration name and key in the corresponding text boxes Please note that the BartPE plugin installer does not validate your registration information so be sure to enter it correctly copying and pasting is recommended The registration information you supply here will be copied to a file named imagew ini which is used by the plugin so that you won t be prompted to enter your registration information each time you boot to the BartPE environment and run Image for Windows 4 By default Image for Windows will not run when BartPE starts up Select the Run Image for Windows automatically option to make Image for Windows run automatically when BartPE loads You can also select to include the TBIView TBlMount and TeraByte OSD Tool programs if they are installed 5 It is recommended to select the Preserve key for writable media option if the PE build will be saved to writable media such as a flash drive 6 Click OK The installer will copy the applicable files to a folder named plugin ifwv2 which will reside directly under the folder you specified in the PE Builder Location text box You should see a confirmation dialog when the installer has finished Image for Windows User Manual Page 87 of 227 Notice The Image for Windows
31. LIABLE FOR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF INCOME USE OR INFORMATION RELATING EITHER TO THE USE OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE OR YOUR RELATIONSHIP WITH TERABYTE EVEN IF TERABYTE HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS Any suit or other legal action relating in any way to this Agreement or to the Evaluation Software must be filed or commenced no later than one 1 year after it accrues You may also have other rights which vary from state to state Image for Windows User Manual Page 222 of 227 6 HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES The Evaluation Software is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use on equipment or software running in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance including but not limited to the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Evaluation Software could contribute to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage High Risk Activities TERABYTE AND ITS SUPPLIERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES TERABYTE DOES NOT AUTHORIZE USE OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE FOR ANY HIGH RISK ACTIVITY YOU AGREE TO DEFEND AND INDEMNIFY TERABYTE AND HOLD TERABYTE HARMLESS FROM AND
32. Name Size Modified Date Backup w0 0x1 2012 03 16 2236 TBI 3 16 2012 9 37 15 PM iy Win7 SRP 2012 03 16 TBI 10 MiB 3 16 2012 9 35 49 PM J di SRECYCLE BIN 3 15 2012 9 12 20 PM q M System Volume Information 11 10 2012 9 48 27 PM dd Temp 9 27 2012 5 17 47 PM TeraByte Unlimited E TBI Filename 35 27GiB Free Backup w0 0x 1 20 12 03 16 2236 TBI Eeva lets 5 Click Next In the window that appears select the location to save the differential backup file You can select a CD DVD BD drive an external hard drive a virtual drive or a partition other than the one you are backing up If you want to store the differential backup on a device that Image for Windows doesn t display just highlight any Windows drive and continue to the next step Note You do not need to store files from a differential or incremental backup in the same location where you store full backup files When you restore a differential or Image for Windows User Manual Page 57 of 227 differential and incremental backup files incremental backup Image for Windows will prompt you for the locations of the full 6 Click Next and Image for Windows displays a window that closely resembles the window shown in Step 4 You can open the list of drives at the top of the window and select the drive where you want to store the differential incremental backup file If you want to store the file on a network drive you can type in the UNC
33. Nevada without regard to U S or Nevada choice of law rules You agree and consent that jurisdiction and proper venue for all claims actions and proceedings of any kind relating to TeraByte or the matters in this License shall be exclusively in courts located in Las Vegas Nevada If a court with the necessary subject matter jurisdiction over a given matter cannot be found in Las Vegas then jurisdiction for that matter shall be exclusively in a court with the proper jurisdiction as close to Las Vegas as possible and within Nevada if possible d SEVERABILITY lf any part or provision of this License is held to be unenforceable for any purpose including but not limited to public policy grounds then you agree that the remainder of the License shall be fully enforceable as if the unenforceable part or provision never existed e NON ASSIGNMENT You may not assign this License without the prior written consent of TeraByte except as part of a sale of all or substantially all of the assets of your business f NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES There are no third party beneficiaries of any promises obligations or representations made by TeraByte herein g HEIRS AND ASSIGNS This Agreement shall be binding on and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs executors administrators successors and assigns of the parties hereto but nothing in this paragraph shall be construed as a consent by TeraByte to any assignment of this agreement except as provided
34. O errors due to too large an I O request e g buggy hardware Actual speed differences may be negligible and depend on the system being used Users accessing RAID 0 or RAID 5 drives may see a benefit from not using the small cache iocf 0 Default if omitted Image for Windows will use 5 a small cache will be used for reading the main image files and reading sectors dt DeleteTarget 1 Use this option to have Image for Windows delete the target partition before restoring or copying to it Depending on the partition being restored or copied to a GPT drive this may be necessary to allow the operation to complete successfully with byte for byte validation Otherwise if Windows makes changes to the existing target partition while in the locked state byte for byte validation will fail Normally an existing partition would be locked and unmounted but remain until the end Image for Windows User Manual Page 143 of 227 of the operation However on GPT drives it appears a Windows system process can and sometimes does modify a locked volume for a brief time when the first writes to the locked volume over Boot begin It does this by reading blocks of data from the area to be written and writing them out to a VSS cache file on the locked volume then after the data being copied or restored has been written overwrites Boot We consider this a Windows bug for the main reason that a locked volume is supposed to be guaranteed exclusiv
35. Scale 1 For NTFS FAT FAT32 EXT 2 3 4 partitions use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to resize each restored partition proportionally so that each partition takes up the same relative amount of space on the target drive as it did on the source drive Unpartitioned free space that existed on the source drive at the time of the backup will still exist at the end of the target drive after Image for Windows completes the restore operation This option only applies when you restore an entire hard drive Default if omitted Image for Windows does not scale each restored partition Ix Expand 1 For NTFS FAT FAT32 EXT 2 3 4 partitions when restoring to a target that is larger than the source partition use this parameter to have Image for Windows expand the partition after completing the restore operation This option is equivalent to the Scale to Fit option for fully restoring drives Default if omitted Image for Windows will not expand the partition and free space will remain after Image for Windows completes the restore operation kf n KeepFree n Use this parameter if you also use either x or stt to specify the amount of space in mebibytes MiB that Image for Windows should leave free Default if omitted Image for Windows will fill the entire available area m FirstFit 1 Image for Windows User Manual Page 169 of 227 When restoring a partition use this parameter to tell Image for Windo
36. VMWare or Hyper V To add a virtual drive while working in Image for Windows click the Add Virtual Drive button to display an Open dialog box In the File name box type the name of the virtual drive you want to add and click Open If the virtual drive name you type doesn t exist Image for Windows displays a message asking if you want to create a file for the virtual drive Click Yes and Image for Windows displays a dialog box where you can define the type and size of the virtual drive You can specify the size in bytes by including no letters Or you can specify the size in Mebibytes by supplying an M or in Gibibytes by supplying a G You can create any of the following types of virtual drives o RAW Fixed Size Creates a plain raw file as the virtual drive Its size is fixed and allocated with zeros on creation o VHD Dynamic Expanding Creates a VirtualPC Dynamic Expanding virtual hard drive o VHD Fixed Size Creates a VirtualPC Fixed Size virtual hard drive o VHDX Dynamic Expanding Creates a Hyper V Dynamic Expanding virtual hard drive o VHDX Fixed Size Creates a Hyper V Fixed Size virtual hard drive o VHDX Dynamic 4KiB Sector Size Creates a Hyper V Dynamic Expanding virtual hard drive with a sector size of 4KiB 4096 bytes o VHDX Fixed Size 4KiB Sector Size Creates a Hyper V Fixed Size virtual hard drive with a sector size of 4KiB 4096 bytes o VMDK Mon
37. Windows program folder For more advanced users please note that Image for Windows will search for this file in the following locations until found the current path the system path the program folder Settings you specify in IFW INI need to be placed under a section name For details on the settings available refer to Tables 1 to 11 in the section Running Image for Windows from the Command Line A typical backup IFW INI file might look like this Options SeqvolID 1 Time Zone PST8PDT BACKUP_DEFAULTS PostValidate 2 HDO UseOrgGeo 1 Image for Windows User Manual Page 121 of 227 Tip If you are manually using BartPE WinPE and the Image for Windows plug in you can use the License section of the imagew ini file to automate entering your Image for Windows product key using the format shown below Use the PE Builder Plugin Installer included with Image for Windows to have this information entered automatically License key username licensenumber Image for Windows Environment Variables You use the SET command to establish Image for Windows environment variables The format for Image for Windows environment variables is SET IFW option1 value option2 value option3 value You set all of the environment variables you can use with Image for Windows by using the same options as you would use from the command line not the INI options The com
38. a full backup and you set many of the same options during both processes When you analyze the steps you take you ll notice the following differences When you create a full backup you identify the source drive you want to back up When you create a differential backup you identify the full backup Image for Windows should reference when creating the differential backup When you create an incremental backup you identify the incremental backup or full backup if no incrementals Image for Windows should reference when creating the new incremental backup Tip It s always a good idea to validate your backup as you create it 1 Double click the Image for Windows icon on your desktop or launch the program from its program group on the Start menu 2 Inthe window that appears select Backup Changes Only Image for Windows User Manual Page 54 of 227 4 Image for Windows 2 86 Welcome to Image for Windows Please choose which operation you would like to perform at this time Operation Backup Full Backup Changes Only Restore Automatic Restore Normal Image for Windows User Manual Page 55 of 227 3 Click Next In the window that appears select the location where you stored the existing full or incremental backup file If you stored the backup image on a device that Image for Windows doesn t display just highlight any Windows drive and continue to the next step i Image
39. a number formatted as OxPVV where P is the extended partition and VV is the volume number in hexadecimal from 01 to FF If you are not sure of the partition or volume ID number run Image for Windows using the interface choose the Backup option and click Next The screen that lists the partitions and volumes also will display the ID in parentheses as a hexadecimal number You should prefix that number with a Ox on the command line td d p d is the target hard drive number td wd p td D td ntsig p td GUID p p is the target partition or volume ID hex or decimal notation depending on whether you are referring to a partition or a volume D is the target drive letter NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the td and before the target hard drive number w Windows device v Virtual drive Drive letter follows The above options are required when you perform a copy using Image for Windows from the command line In Table 10 you find a list of the optional copy parameters you can use when you run Image for Windows from the command line The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the options are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these
40. alignment when you copy from the command line and the source contains 1MiB aligned partitions Use this option to instruct Image for Windows not to automatically override normal cylinder based alignment If you don t enable this option and Image for Windows determines that 1MiB partition alignment is needed then Image for Windows enables both the Align2048 and the AlignEndHS options for the restore Note This option has been deprecated but will remain supported for backwards compatibility The att option should be used instead Default if omitted Alignment is automatically determined when copying from the command line aoe n AlignOnEnd n Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to align copied partitions at the end of a cylinder or when the Align2048 option is enabled end of a 1MiB boundary 2 Align on end by resizing 0 Disable align on end Default if omitted Normal alignment aoe 1 is used a2k Align2048 1 Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to align copied partitions based on 1MiB boundaries drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors If this option is enabled then you will normally want to enable the AlignEndHS ahs option and disable the AlignOnEnd aoe 0 option Default if omitted The alignment is based on cylinders av
41. all information regarding the design structure or internal operation of the Software are valuable trade secrets of TeraByte or third parties with which TeraByte has licensing arrangements Confidential Information provided however that Confidential Information shall not include information which otherwise would be Confidential Information to the extent that such information was publicly known or otherwise known to you previously to the time of disclosure which subsequently became known through no act or omission by you or which otherwise became known to you other than through disclosure by TeraByte without violation of any party s obligations to TeraByte You shall not sell transfer publish disclose display or otherwise permit access to any Confidential Information by any third party nor may you use any of the Confidential Information except strictly as part of the Software in the form originally distributed by TeraByte 4 LIMITED WARRANTY TeraByte Unlimited warrants that for a period of thirty 30 days from the date of purchase the Software will perform in conformity with the user documentation supplied by TeraByte provided that your EXCLUSIVE REMEDY under this warranty shall be to return the Software to TeraByte in exchange for repair replacement or a full refund of your purchase price at TeraByte s option within forty five 45 days after the date of purchase In addition the above warranty does not apply to the extent that any fai
42. any its employees and in house contractors and that organization s in house Computer Systems owned or controlled by that organization 3 Your subsidiary organization or organizations if any those organizations employees and in house contractors and those organization s in house Computer Systems owned or controlled by those organizations and 4 Your affiliated organizations if any affiliated organization means any organization which is under majority control or ownership by the same parent that majority owns or majority controls you those organizations employees and in house contractors and those organization s in house Computer Systems owned or controlled by those organizations ii Personal or Home Users If you are a real person and if all Software under this license is used exclusively for personal non commercial use only then each licensed copy may be installed on two additional Computer Systems owned or controlled by you or a member of your immediate family Control For purposes of this Agreement a person or entity controls a Computer System when he she or it has actual control over the day to day use of that Computer System d RESERVATION OF RIGHTS All rights and licenses not expressly granted by TeraByte in this Agreement are entirely and exclusively reserved to TeraByte e IMAGE LICENSES lf the Software s functionality as licensed includes the ability to create one or more dis
43. any of the base images When restoring from a differential or incremental backup use this parameter to identify the base backup Image for Windows should use base x bkup x is source drive letter base x mypath bkup mypath or my path is path to bkup base x my path bkup bkup is name of the base backup omit Or the file extension r oase d p bkup or oase d p mypath bkup AN ne device partition path and base d p my path bkup dis source hard drive number Image for Windows User Manual Page 165 of 227 pase ntsig p mypath bkup p is source partition ID hex or decimal base GUID p mypath bkup notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the base and before the source hard drive number w Windows device o Optical drive when you combine this option with any of the options mentioned above this option must come last Whether using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of quotes clr N A Use this option to have Image for Windows clear the MBR and EMBR prior to restoring an image file Default if omitted Image for Windows does not clear the MBR and EMBR ro n N A Use this option to have Image for Windows reboot shutdown suspend or hibernate the system after restor
44. boot disc and then use either of those programs to restore your image In both cases when you boot your computer you don t boot to Windows so your Windows installation is not in use and you can safely restore it Note When you purchase Image for Windows you automatically receive copies of Image for DOS and Image for Linux If you download the trial version of Image for Windows you can also download the trial versions of Image for DOS and Image for Linux You can easily create an Image for DOS or Image for Linux boot disc using the MakeDisk utility that comes with those programs just follow the steps in the section Installing Image for DOS or Installing Image for Linux of the respective manual The images you create using Image for Windows are fully compatible with the other TeraByte Unlimited Version 2 imaging programs such as Image for DOS and Image for Linux For example you can create an image using Image for Windows and restore it using Image for DOS or Image for Linux The reverse is also true Images created by other TeraByte Unlimited imaging programs are compatible with Image for Windows Ways to Use Image for Windows You can use Image for Windows in a variety of ways Image for Windows User Manual Page 8 of 227 Local Usage You can make a backup with Image for Windows and the free add on PHYLock that comes with Image for Windows You can store the backup on a secondary hard drive partition o
45. can use this text box to assign descriptive text to individual backups The description you enter will be visible in the file list that appears when you are preparing to restore or validate a backup You view the description by selecting the backup and clicking the File Description button in Image for Windows or pressing F1 in Image for DOS Linux Save Defaults Click this button to save the settings you establish In the future Image for Windows will display these settings automatically Show Command Click this button to display the information you would type at a command prompt to start a backup with the options you selected as you displayed the various windows in Image for Windows You can use this information to create a batch file or TBScript TBS file that runs Image for Windows by selecting the Save to File option The command line can be edited before being saved For details on using Image for Windows from a command prompt see the section Running Image for Windows from the Command Line on Page 124 Schedule Backup Click this button to create a task in the Windows Task Scheduler with a command line that corresponds to the current backup operation Please refer to Appendix D Scheduling Backups for more information Additional Backup Options for Removable Media When saving images to removable media such as CD DVD BD discs the following additional options appear vy CUY nesuns write Reboot when Completed lal 2
46. disabled until enabled using the Windows fsutil program fsutil behavior set DisableDeleteNotify 0 If IFW completes the operation even with errors reported TRIM will be properly reset to the enabled state Speed up Changes Only Backup Select this option to have Image for Windows create a hash file to speed up creating a Changes Only differential or incremental backup This option is only available when creating an image that is not being saved to disc media CD DVD BD By default this option is also ignored if the Backwards Compatible option is enabled The hash file will be limited to the max file size and have the same file name as the backup with an extension starting at 0 followed by 1 2 etc as needed The actual speed increase realized when creating an image will vary depending on the system If the hash file is deleted the Image for Windows User Manual Page 50 of 227 back up will proceed as normal without it To create a hash for an existing image use the hash operation command line parameter Backwards Compatible Current versions of Image for Windows may use a TBI format that is not compatible with prior versions Select this option to have Image for Windows create the TBI file using a format that is compatible with version 2 50 If desired use the BackwardsCompatibleLevel INI file option to specify a more current file version Note that this option will not be available if the backup requires a newer version to s
47. disabling the default option 64 Network users may find some combination of values work better than what Image for Windows determines to use itself Default if omitted Image for Windows determines if it should disable the write cache on removable drives 64 and uses the other values as it sees fit min N A Use this option to have Image for Windows minimize itself Default if omitted Image for Windows does not automatically minimize itself hide N A Use this option to have Image for Windows hide the user interface Note This option applies only to the GUI version of Image for Windows Default if omitted Image for Windows will display the GUI wait i WA Use this option to have Image for Windows wait for another instance of the program to finish and then proceed with the specified operation When used this option must be the first parameter This option is automatically used when Image for Windows creates a scheduled task Default if omitted If another instance of the program is running Image for Windows will ignore the specified operation and switch to the running program nowait N A This option allows running multiple instances of Image for Windows This option will also disable usage of PHYLock and VSS When used this option must be the first parameter Default if omitted If another instance of the program is running Image for Windows will ignore the specified operation and switch to the running pro
48. diskette If you don t check this option MakeDisk will not run but the Image for DOS recovery disk files will still be installed if you selected the applicable option in Step 6 Create Image for Linux Recovery Disk This option runs the MakeDisk utility which helps you create a bootable Image for Linux USB flash drive CD DVD ISO image or floppy diskette If you don t check this option MakeDisk will not run but the Image for Linux recovery media files will still be installed if you selected the applicable option in Step 6 Image for Windows User Manual Page 22 of 227 Create Image for UEFI Recovery Disk This option runs the MakeDisk utility which helps you create a bootable Image for UEFI USB flash drive CD DVD ISO image or floppy diskette If you don t check this option MakeDisk will not run but the Image for UEFI recovery media files will still be installed if you selected the applicable option in Step 6 9 Click Next and the Ready to Install window appears summarizing your choices 5 Setup Image for Windows V2 Ready to Install Setup is now ready to begin installing Image for Windows V2 on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or dick Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location C Program Files x86 TeraByte Unlimited Image for Windows V2 Setup type Full installation Selected components Image for Windows PHYLock Allows backup w
49. for Windows 2 86 Select where the existing backup file is located Computer B Windows Drives ik H A i LJ C Win7 7 54GiB Free es 3 Entire Network covo h D SONY DVD RW AW Q170A H E HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 H E HD 4 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E inf Virtual Drives Image for Windows User Manual Page 56 of 227 4 Click Next Image for Windows displays a window where you can select the name of the existing backup If the existing backup you want to select doesn t appear open the list of drives at the top right corner of the window and select the drive containing the backup file If you stored the backup on a network drive or a drive Image for Windows does not display you can click the Windows Network Browse button to navigate to the drive After selecting a drive select the backup file so that its name appears in the Filename box at the bottom of the window If you select a file that you created using the encryption or the password protect option you will need supply the correct password to continue Additionally Image for Windows will prompt for the locations of any backups in the selected chain if it s unable to locate them in the folder of the existing backup Image for Windows 2 86 l l e Select the existing backup file to use File Description l Windows Network Browse E Data 35 27GiB Free z
50. format where name is the stored password name for the login name If SSL is required please see the KB article Sending Emails from Image for Windows to Servers that Require SSL for details Email Server smtp mydomain com Port 25 User login mydomain com Password b gt From from mydomain com To to mydomain com Subject JE Examples are shown below Using default subject text Subject Jf Image for Windows User Manual Page 39 of 227 Using custom failure subject text Subject J IFW Backup Failed Error ec Using custom success failure subject text default port and a stored password Port leave blank Password loginname Subject IFW Backup Completed IFW Backup Failed Error ec Using the default subject text as used by version 2 71 and earlier Subject leave blank Using the custom subject text as used by version 2 71 and earlier Subject IFW Operation Result ec Note Emails will not be sent if using Log Level 10 LogLeve1 10 or higher unless logging is disabled for the operation Geometry Settings Image for Windows Settings jm es General Geometry PHYLock VSS Scheduled Tasks Password Global Geometry Settings F Disabled V Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries W Align MBR for BIOS Auto Mode F Assume Same Target System Validate Geometry Before Use F Use Source Host Geometry COK cancel Hel
51. gt exclude all mpg files in the Movies folder and all sub folders folders will not be deleted ISO Files Old iso gt exclude all iso files in ISO Files Old folder and all sub folders Default if omitted Image for Windows includes all files on the partition in the backup the page file and hibernation file will be included or excluded per their respective options Image for Windows User Manual Page 162 of 227 log 0 SaveLog 0 Disables logging Default if omitted Image for Windows logs during a backup operation Image for Windows Restore Options In Table 5 you find the command line options that you must set to use Image for Windows to restore a backup image The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Restore_Defaults section Table 5 Image for Windows Required Restore Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable Ir N A Use this option to indicate that you want to restore an image file Also required The f option to specify image file Image for Windows should use when restoring d N A Use when restoring a backup to identify the target hard drive and partition Image for Windows will restore the image to the same hard dri
52. hard drive But if things really go wrong and the primary copy of the backup isn t available you can fall back on the copy of the backup that you saved on CD DVD BD discs Don t get rid of an existing set of backup discs when you create a new set Instead keep two or more sets of backup discs That way you can fall back to an older backup if something should go wrong with the newest backup If you are using multiple sets of backup CD DVD BD discs keep the newest set offsite to guard against physical damage Use multiple external hard drives and rotate between them Keep at least one drive offsite Creating Backups with Image for Windows When you create a backup you can create either a full backup a differential backup or an incremental backup A full backup is exactly what it sounds like Image for Windows backs up your entire hard disk Differential and incremental backups works in conjunction with a full backup you create a full backup the first time and then create differential or incremental backups which contain only changes for subsequent backups A differential backup will initially be smaller than a full backup but as you make changes on your hard drive the size of the differential backup will grow over time And because Image for Windows is a sector based backup the smaller file size may not be as small as you expect An incremental backup will contain only the changes since the last full or incremental backup
53. hereinabove h SURVIVAL The provisions of paragraphs 1 b iv 1 b vii 1 b ix 2 3 and 6 of this Agreement shall survive any termination or expiration of this Agreement Image for Windows User Manual Page 227 of 227
54. is too small to let you view all the information you will most likely need to redirect it to a file Examine the output and find the details of the partition you re going to restore The Last Used Sector value determines the minimum space required to restore the partition For additional information on using this method please see the corresponding TeraByte KB article To Check by Attempting to Restore the Partition Image Note This method is included for completeness only 1 Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice and select to do a normal restore of the partition Select the destination partition or free space area and click Next A notice with the number of MiBs required will be displayed if the destination is too small If you must know the minimum size and the notice is not displayed you can select a very small partition or one you know is too small as the target Important Note When restoring or copying a partition any unallocated space located adjacent to the destination partition will be included in the available size For example if the drive contains a 10GB partition and has 25GB of free space adjacent to it you could successfully restore a partition image that requires 30GB to the 10GB partition The restored partition will begin at whichever location is Image for Windows User Manual Page 213 of 227 located towards the beginning of the drive For example if the free space is located before the part
55. it is located outside the range of the current geometry Use Global Settings Enable to allow global geometry settings to control the drive Save as Default Select this option to save the current settings to the IFW INI file as the defaults Image for Windows User Manual Page 96 of 227 Image for Windows Restore Options During the restore process you can set a variety of options These options will vary depending on whether you are restoring a full drive image or a partition image Options available when restoring a partition are shown in the figure below TeraByte Unlimited Validate Before Restore Validate Byte for Byte Wipe Unused Sectors Move to Original MBR Entry GPT Hidden From OS Assume Original HD Ignore 10 Errors 7 Disable Media Ejection V Log Results to File Change Volume SN Reboot when Completed m K Image for Windows 2 98 S Restore Options Eirst Track Sectors Set Active a Update BOOT INI AUTO Write Changed Sectors Only Update Boot Partition Resize After Restore Write Standard MBR Code Min Nes Man Restore Disk Signature Restore First Track 31 MiB 40955 Change GUID New Name Save Defaults Show Command Set Active If you select this option Image for Windows will make the restored partition the active partition after completing the restore operation Otherwise Image for Windows will
56. n can be 1 to reboot with all prompts 2 to reboot with completion message but without reboot message error does not cancel reboot 4 to reboot without completion message or reboot message error cancels reboot 8 to shutdown 16 to suspend sleep or 32 to hibernate If the specified option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown If suspend or hibernate is requested and a shutdown or reboot is required a shutdown is performed instead Default if omitted Image for Windows attempts to determine if the computer needs to be rebooted after copying and if so prompts you to reboot fd ForceDismount 1 Use this option to force dismounting a volume partition that can t be locked for copy Using this option will invalidate all opened handles to the volume which may result in lost data Image for Windows will attempt to lock the volume after forcing the dismount Default if omitted Normal locking without forcing a dismount occurs Image for Windows User Manual Page 184 of 227 sig ReplaceNTSig 1 Use this option if you are copying a partition that Windows had assigned a drive letter before you copied the drive If you use this option Image for Windows will copy the disk signature associated with the source partition Note The disk GUID of a target GPT drive will not be changed Default if omitted Image for Windows will use the disk signature al
57. need to reboot and you won t be prompted to do so Image for Windows User Manual Page 24 of 227 Formulating a Backup Plan Before you create your first backup with Image for Windows we suggest that you formulate a backup plan There are very few rules to follow please consider the following ideas to help you create a backup that will help you easily recover from a disaster For more information on backup strategies see Appendix B Backup Strategies on Page 199 Consider the Destination for Your Backup Suppose that you will be backing up around 30 GB of data In this case you probably will not want to store the backup on a set of CD R RW discs since the resulting backup will likely require 20 discs or more based on an expected compression ratio of 40 60 Better options in this case would be Back up directly to a set of DVD or BD discs Backup to an alternate hard drive partition and perhaps use the free add on utility BINGBURN later to burn the backup to a set of DVD BD discs Backup to an external hard drive the recommended alternative Plan your Backup with a Restore Strategy in Mind As obvious as it sounds we need to Say it Backing up isn t truly helpful unless you can restore the backup So plan not only your backup strategy but your restore strategy First and foremost validate your backup to make sure that you can if necessary restore it Regardless of whether you store your backup on disc medi
58. need to remove almost everything that isn t part of the standard Windows installation In these cases you may want to consider the option of installing Windows to the new drive and starting over fresh Make Sure the File System is Clean Whether restoring to a smaller drive or to a smaller partition file system errors on any of the source partitions can cause numerous errors including failure to resize or compact the partition If you are unsure of the condition of the file system you may want to run chkdsk on it before imaging or copying it In general it s a good idea to run MEMTEST86 before running chkdsk bad memory may cause chkdsk to corrupt the partition To do this open a Command Prompt an Administrator Command Prompt is required in versions of Windows with UAC is enabled and run the following command making sure to use the correct drive letter for the partition to be checked chkdsk c f Note that checking some partitions such as the Windows partition may require Windows to restart In the case of multiple partitions needing to be checked it may be advantageous to check them from WinPE e g TBWinPE since Windows isn t running and no partitions are locked restarts will not be required Image for Windows User Manual Page 214 of 227 Compact or Resize the Partition s Compacting or resizing a partition requires that it be available to be modified If the only source of the desired partition is an image b
59. on the source drive Change Disk ID and GUIDs This option only applies to full drive restores It allows you to change the NT Signature restored to the target drive For target GPT drives the MBR NT Signature the GPT Disk GUID and the partition GUIDs will all be changed This can be useful if you plan on having both the original and restored hard drive in the same computer at the same time otherwise Windows may detect the duplicate signature and modify it which may depending on the OS prevent the restored hard drive from booting properly Image for Windows User Manual Page 100 of 227 Remove Gaps on Restore This option only applies to full drive restores Select this option to remove any gaps free space between partitions Partitions will be restored adjacent to each other Scale to Target This option only applies to full drive restores If you use this option when restoring an image Image for Windows restores the image proportionally to the target drive For example suppose that you backed up a 250 GB hard drive and restored the image to a 500 GB hard drive If you use this option you allow Image for Windows to double the size of the restored image This option only works for FAT FAT32 NTFS and EXT 2 3 4 file systems and has no effect on images restored to hard drives using other file systems You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to Fit option If you inadvertently enable both options Scale to Fit wil
60. option If you inadvertently enable both options Scale to Fit will take precedence Align to Target This option only applies to full drive copies If you select this option Image for Windows will force alignment to the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive For example if the Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries global option is enabled the restored drive will be aligned on 1MiB Image for Windows User Manual Page 113 of 227 boundaries If this option is not selected the alignment used on the target drive will be determined automatically based on the source drive Change Disk ID and GUIDs This option only applies to full drive copies It allows you to change the NT Signature restored to the target drive For target GPT drives the MBR NT Signature the GPT Disk GUID and the partition GUIDs will all be changed This can be useful if you plan on having both the original and restored hard drive in the same computer at the same time otherwise Windows may detect the duplicate signature and modify it which may depending on the OS prevent the restored hard drive from booting properly Remove Gaps on Copy Select this option to remove any gaps free space between partitions Partitions will be copied adjacent to each other First Track Sectors This text box allows you to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive should be copied If you enter AUTO in this box the tracks needed for th
61. or click the Windows Network Browse button to navigate to the share If you want to store the backup on a drive Image for Windows does not display you can click the Windows Network Browse button to navigate to the drive Note Windows Vista amp Windows 7 users must select the Desktop item or show the folders window on the left pane for the network option to appear Type a name for the differential incremental backup file or accept the default name Image for Windows suggests that includes identifying information The suggested name includes the following information in the order it appears w for Windows a number representing the drive being backed up the letters chg which represent the word changes and 6 YYYY MM DD HHMMS representing the date in 4 digit year 2 digit month and 2 digit day format and time in 2 digit hour and minute format the backup starts If you selected a backup of a partition instead of an entire drive the partition ID follows the drive number 7 On the Backup Options screen that appears select the options you want to use See the section Setting Backup Options on Page 48 for an explanation of each option 8 Ifyou are backing up to CD DVD BD discs insert a blank disc 9 Onthe Summary screen that appears select Start when you are ready to begin the backup process A progress bar appears on screen You can interrupt the backup and validation operati
62. or if the partition uses an unrecognized file system the target drive needs to be equal to the full size of the source partition regardless of cluster allocation Figure 2 shows the same number of clusters in use but the ast cluster in use is located in the fifth row rather than at the very end of the partition Figure 2 Image for Windows User Manual Page 203 of 227 Although Figure 1 and Figure 2 depict the exact same number of used clusters the location of the last used cluster in Figure 2 allows you to restore an image of that partition to a much smaller target because when an image is restored each cluster is placed in a location on the target that is identical relatively speaking to its original location on the drive you inaged called the source drive Note You can use the Compact feature of the Terabyte Unlimited imaging programs to reduce the size required when restoring or copying Figure 3 shows the same number of clusters in use but the clusters are arranged optimally with no unused clusters interspersed Figure 3 Although the used cluster arrangement of Figure 3 might be most ideal you generally can t easily arrange clusters in this way Image for Windows User Manual Page 204 of 227 Appendix D Scheduling Backups Image for Windows contains a feature you can use to create tasks to schedule Image for Windows backups using the Windows Task Scheduler incl
63. provide less compression Backup files will normally be compressed more than the Standard option Enhanced Size values 2 10 offer increased compression as the value increases at the expense of speed Enhanced Size values 11 13 D E F offer slightly less compression at a faster speed than their 2 7 10 A B C counterparts The Enhanced Speed A B options offer decent compression with the emphasis on back up speed over backup file size Backup files will normally be compressed less than the Standard option Value 15 offers higher compression than 14 at the expense of speed Actual compression levels and speeds obtained will vary depending on the data being backed up and the system being used Note The Enhanced Size D E F options and the Enhanced Speed A B options are not backwards compatible and require version 2 72 or later Attempting to open a backup file created using a compression value higher than 10 with version 2 71 or earlier will result in a message to use the newer version or an error message that the image is corrupt depending on the older version being used Default if omitted Image for Windows uses Enhanced Speed A compression enc 1 or enc 3 Encryption 1 or Encryption 3 Specifies whether simple password protection without encryption enc 1 or 256 bit AES encryption enc 3 is to be used If either enc 1 or enc 3 are specified pw is also required Default if omitted No encryption or password protecti
64. restore an image from another system to a drive that will be put back in the other system For example the hard drive from PC A is backed up PC B is used to restore to a new hard that new drive is placed back in PC A Without this option enabled Image for Windows would setup the partition to properly boot on the hard drive for PC B which can sometimes not always be a problem when the hard drive is going back to PC A This option solves that and is equivalent to the individual Use MBR Geometry override Validate Geometry Before Use This option is used to ensure that the geometry from the MBR on the original system is aligned to known standards before accepting it for use It only applies when Assume Same Target System is enabled Image for Windows User Manual Page 41 of 227 Use Source Host Geometry This option is the global equivalent to the individual Use Original Geometry override PHYLock VSS Settings Image for Windows Settings l General Geometry PHYLock VSS Scheduled Tasks Password PHYLock Settings Disable Usage Write Free Time ms 4250 a Use If Locking Fails Max Wait Time M 10 E aR RAM Cache Size KiB 8192 V Volume Flush Disk Si B 600 7 Use Disk Storage isk Cache Size MB E Throttle on Reads IO Throtte Delay ms 0 V Throttle on Writes IO Throttle Abort ms 80 IO Throttle Interval ms 100 Memory ti z Track Writes VSS Settings Use VSS When Available Use Component
65. retry recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector s Disable Media Ejection When removable media is used this option prevents Image for Windows from automatically ejecting the removable media If you don t select this option Image for Windows will eject the media whenever new media is needed and at the completion of the backup operation Log Results to File Select this option to make Image for Windows log the details of the operations it performs Image for Windows saves the log as IFW LOG in the IMAGEW EXE program folder To be able to save IFW LOG Image for Windows must have permissions to write to the target folder this is usually not a problem in Windows Image for Windows User Manual Page 49 of 227 Reboot when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer reboot after completing the backup operation Shutdown when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer shut down after completing the backup operation Suspend when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer suspend sleep after completing the backup operation Hibernate when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer hibernate after completing the backup operation If multiple power options are selected precedence is as follows suspend hibernate shutd
66. supported by this option Delete Restore Destination Enable this option to have Image for Windows delete the target partition before restoring or copying to it Depending on the partition being restored or copied to a GPT drive this may be necessary to allow the operation to complete successfully with byte for byte validation Otherwise if Windows makes changes to the existing target partition while in the locked state byte for byte validation will fail Partition Selection These options control how Image for Windows allows partitions to be selected The default is Linked Check Boxes CD Boot Image This option allows you to choose which product you want bootable on any backups directly stored on CD DVD It does this by using variations of the CDBOOT INS file See the Image for DOS Linux manuals for details on CDBOOT INS Image for Windows User Manual Page 38 of 227 Log File Enter a path and file name for the log file you want Image for Windows to maintain Don t add quotes If you leave this blank Image for Windows creates the log file IFW LOG in the same folder where you installed imagew exe the default location is C Program Files TeraByte Unlimited lmage for Windows V2 You can enable or disable logging using the Log Results to File option please refer to the section below Setting Backup Options Clicking the Notepad button will display the current log file using Notepad Max Log File Maxi
67. systems Move to Original MBR Entry If you select this option Image for DOS will move the partition table entry of the restored partition to the same location in the master partition table as it had on the source drive Image for DOS will also move the existing partition table entry to another location rather than overwrite it You may want to enable this option if you use an environment that tracks master partition table entries such as Linux GPT Hidden From OS Use this option when restoring to a GPT drive to indicate that the operating system being restored will not see the destination drive as GPT when booted For example an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the OxEE placeholder partition is missing from the MBR Using this option prevents Image for DOS from using GPT specific fix up information on the drive after the restore Assume Original HD If you select this option which mainly applies to Linux partitions Image for DOS will keep references to the source hard drive number intact within the partitions that have been restored to the target If you do not select this option and the target drive number differs from that of the source drive applicable drive references residing within the restored partitions will be updated to reflect the new hard drive number This option has no effect if you are restoring to a target drive whose number matches that of the source drive If you are restoring to a target drive whose number d
68. t detect any USB devices USB 2 0 support is always enabled regardless of this option Correct USB Hang 1 If you experience problems with USB devices hanging you can enable this option to attempt to correct it This option can degrade USB IO performance Correct USB Hang 2 If you experience problems with USB devices hanging you can enable this option to attempt to correct it This option can degrade USB IO performance Disable Checkbox Selection Disables the use of check boxes to select partitions and makes partition selection function the same as previous versions Click Next and the Global Geometry Options screen appears ie MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 Sa m Global Geometry Options optional Disable Global Geometry Disable Align MBR for BIOS Auto Mode Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries Assume Same Target System Use Source Host Geometry Disable Validate Geometry Before Use Cancel lt lt Previous Copyright 2004 2013 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Check boxes to enable the options Disable Global Geometry Check this box to disable the global geometry settings and revert to using program defaults or drive specific overrides equivalent to versions prior to 2 52 Disable Align MBR for BIOS Auto Mode This option is enabled by default to prevent problems with unaligned partitions on systems with their BIOS using Auto Mode Many newer systems use
69. the SID for Windows you should use the MS sysprep utility or you can download a free utility named NewSID You may want to set up the base machine so that the last partition ends at one track less than the actual end of the hard drive around 8 MB less to leave room for different brands or models of the same size hard drive You might also want to read the following information stored on the Terabyte website http www terabyteunlimited com kb article php id 033 Image for Windows User Manual Page 118 of 227 See the following for more information on how to prepare for deployment for Windows XP How to Use the Sysprep Tool to Automate Successful Deployment of Windows XP http support microsoft com kb 302577 Windows XP How to and Technical Article Resources http technet microsoft com en us library 0b878149 aspx Download for the Microsoft Windows XP SP1 Deployment Tools http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid 7A83123D 507B 4095 9D9D 0A195F7B5F69 amp displaylang en Download for the Microsoft Windows XP SP2 Deployment Tools http www microsoft com downloads info aspx na 47 amp p 1 amp SrcDisplayLang en amp SrcCategoryld amp SrcFamilyld 0c4bfb06 2824 4d2b abc1 0e22231 33afb amp u details aspx 3ffamilyid 3d3E90DC91 AC56 4665 949B BEDA3080E0F6 26displaylang 3den See the following for more information on how to prepare for deployment for Windows Vista http technet2 microsoft com Windows Vista en libra
70. the next highest speed supported by both the drive and the media in use DVD speeds are approximately 1 8 CD speeds so if you are using DVD discs multiply the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use here For example to obtain a maximum reading speed of 4X with a DVD use cdrs 32 since 8 x 4X 32 Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the Optimal speed setting iobs n lIOBS n Include this option to try to improve I O performance in cases where network or USB device performance is poor This can also help improve end user performance of saving data files while imaging is occurring particularly when the backup target is a slower link Provide n as the letter A to automatically try to determine the best value otherwise try a value such as 1 2 or 3 Default if omitted Image for Windows does not use this option err AllowErrors 1 Use this option to tell Image for Windows to ignore read write errors caused by bad sectors on the source drive during the backup operation Image for Windows will also ignore errors during the validation phase This parameter does not apply to bad sectors on the target drive Default if omitted Image for Windows will notify you concerning the error and give you the option to continue or abort mf N A Instructs Image for Windows to use Multiple File Set mode Select this option to create a backup that is comprised of one image for every individual partition that you back
71. this option which mainly applies to Linux partitions Image for Windows will keep references to the source hard drive number intact within the partitions that have been restored to the target If you do not select this option and the target drive number differs from that of the source drive applicable drive references residing within the restored partitions will be updated to reflect the new hard drive number This option has no effect if you are restoring to a target drive whose number matches that of the source drive If you are restoring to a target drive whose number differs from that of the source drive but you plan to subsequently move the target drive so that its number matches the source drive again enabling this option can be beneficial Ignore IO Errors Under ordinary circumstances if Image for Windows encounters a bad sector on the target drive while restoring an image Image for Windows will notify you concerning the write error and give you the option to continue or abort If you select the Ignore IO Errors option Image for Windows will ignore the error and continue Generally you should select this option only if you need to restore to a target drive that contains known bad sectors On some systems if you select this setting and Image for Windows encounters bad sectors there will be a significant delay as the internal retry recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector s Disable Media Ejection When
72. to attempt a normal lock and then use PHYLock even if the lock was obtained If Image for Windows obtains a normal lock the lock is released after enabling PHYLock Default if omitted Image for Windows uses a normal lock if it can obtain one if not Image for Windows uses PHYLock to lock the disk or partition plvolf PHYLockVolFlush 1 Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to attempt to flush the disk cache of the source drive before attempting to obtain a normal lock or enabling PHYLock Default if omitted Image for Windows does not try to flush the disk cache pldisk PHYLockUseDisk 1 Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to attempt to use disk based storage for the PHYLock cache with a size specified by the pldcs parameter Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g pldisk 0 Default if omitted This option will be enabled Image for Windows User Manual Page 147 of 227 plmem n PHYLockMemory n Use this option to control how much computer memory PHYLock will allocate for itself You only need to increase the allocation size if you receive the error PHYLock failed to cache changes and increasing the PHYLock memory and or disk cache i e plcs and or pldcs has not solved the problem Replace n with either 2 1 or 0 Using a value of 2 instructs PHYLock to use a smaller memory allocation while 1 and 0 correspond to a normal and larger allocation respectively
73. to identify the drive instead of the drive number Disable Power Changes Check this box to disable the Power Options combo box while Image for Windows backs up restores copies or validates Disable Priority Changes Check this box to disable the Process Priority combo box while Image for Windows backs up restores copies or validates No Service Control Check this box to have Image for Windows ignore the services ins file See the section Image for Windows and Windows Services on Page 123 for details on using the services ins file to let Image for Windows control the services running under Windows Show Entire Network This option determines whether the Entire Network item appears in the window where you select a location to back up or use to save backup files When you enable this option Image for Windows searches the network for servers shares drives and partitions If you find that the search takes longer than you d like disable this option Bold Views Select to enable using bold fonts on certain radio buttons tree views and list views Use Windows FS Support This option allows Image for Windows to back up or copy used areas of certain File Systems supported by Windows but not directly by Image for Windows While it s able to access only used areas for a smaller and faster backup or copy it does not allow resizing or file exclusions of those volumes As of this writing ReFS is the only file system
74. to write only the changed sectors to the target drive target will be read to compare Useful in cases where a large portion of the data is the same and it s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive e g restoring to SSD drive This option is unavailable if not supported by the drive Scale to Fit On FAT FAT32 NTFS or EXT 2 3 4 file systems selecting this option will make Image for DOS assume that the size of the original hard drive is based on the location of the end of the last partition Image for DOS then applies the same scaling to the target hard drive If any unpartitioned space existed at the end of the source drive that unpartitioned space won t exist on the target drive after you restore your image This option has no effect on images restored to hard drives using other file systems You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to Target option If you inadvertently enable both options Scale to Fit will take precedence Image for Windows User Manual Page 79 of 227 Align to Target If you select this option Image for DOS will force alignment to the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive For example if the Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries global option is enabled the restored drive will be aligned on 1MiB boundaries If this option is not selected the alignment used on the target drive will be determined automatically based on the source drive Change Disk ID and GUIDs
75. used to specify the file name of the new image file Use the base parameter to specify the starting file to combine all files from the this file back to the original base file will be combined Optionally you can specify the hash option to automatically create the hash file for the new image file To remove the combined files specify the del option to delete the original image files combined after the process has finished deleting the files will render any remaining incrementals in the chain unusable In the following examples a full backup has been created followed by five incremental backups E Backups Win7 Full tbi E Backups Win7 Inc 1 tbi E Backups Win7 Inc 2 tbi E Backups Win7 Inc 3 tbi E Backups Win7 Inc 4 tbi E Backups Win7 Inc 5 tbi Running the following command will combine all five incremental backups and the base full into a new backup image named Win7 Current The existing incremental files will not be deleted and a hash file will not be created for the new backup file The command should be on one line imagew combine f E Backups Win7 Current Image for Windows User Manual Page 194 of 227 base E Backups Win7 Inc 5 Restoring Win7 Current would be the same as restoring Win7 Inc 5 Running the following command will combine only the first three incremental backups and the base full into a new backup image named Win7 Base3 Additionally
76. using this option the restored file system should not be trusted You should attempt to obtain the files you need which may not be valid then reformat the partition or restore a good image Default if omitted An incomplete image is reported when opened and boot sector data is not updated or cleared on a restore that fails logfile x path to logfile txt LogFile x path to logfile txt Use this parameter to specify the path and filename of the log file x is a drive letter path is the desired path ogfile or log file is the name of the log file and txt is the file extension of the log file name Image for Windows doesn t automatically add a file extension If you use paths and or filenames with imbedded spaces enclose them in quotation marks The folder you specify for the log file must exist prior to performing an applicable operation in Image for Windows If the path does not exist Image for Windows will not Image for Windows User Manual Page 128 of 227 create the specified log file Default if omitted If logging has not been disabled with log 0 a log named IFW LOG is created in the current directory of the operating environment logmax n LogMaxSize n Ensures the log file doesn t grow beyond the size ngiven Once nis reached the data from the top of the file is purged Because of this you typically don t want a large n value n can be bytes KiB or MiB Decimal values e g 2 5MiB a
77. want PHYLock to use to maintain data consistency The default value is 8192 8192 KB 1024 8 MB You should not use a value below 2048 for this setting even if you enabled the Use Disk Storage setting If you back up an NTFS partition and you don t check the Use Disk Storage box then you need to weigh the value of the RAM Cache Size KB setting against the size of the NTFS log You should keep the value of the RAM Cache Size above the size of the NTFS log by increasing the RAM Cache Size value reducing the size of the NTFS log or both You can check the size of the NTFS log file using the command line CHKDSK lt drive letter gt L The same command line will show you the default NTFS log size for the volume in question You can change the size of the NTFS log using CHKDSK lt drive letter gt L lt log file size KB gt Do not set the size of the NTFS log to a value lower than 4096 KB If you make the NTFS log too small your computer may experience performance degradation or it may fail to boot Again you only need to consider the log file size when you re not using the Use Disk Storage option Disk Cache Size MB In this box type the amount of hard disk space Image for Windows should allocate to PHYLock when you also check the Use Disk Storage box 10 Throttle Delay ms This value controls the amount of time the application delays after allowing pending IO to occur This value should be kept low otherwise th
78. way this option functions and scaling is performed placing the recovery partition at the start of the drive is recommended This allows easy scaling to different size drives when restoring Example A Windows drive contains the following four partitions ID 0x1 Recovery Partition ID 0x2 System Reserved ID 0x3 Windows ID 0x4 Data The Recovery partition contains a backup image of partitions 0x2 0x3 and 0x4 A restore of those partitions that would scale to a different size drive would be performed by running the following command imagew r d w0 f w0 0x1 Recovery tbi sp 0x2 0x3 0x4 x rft rp 0x1 ubp Default if omitted Image for Windows will not support scaling a multi partition restore Iv PreValidate 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows perform a standard validation on the image file s prior before restoring them Default if omitted Image for Windows does not validate the image files before restoring them Image for Windows User Manual Page 170 of 227 vb PostValidate 2 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows check that each byte from the source image file was restored to the drive properly Default if omitted Image for Windows does not validate the restored data sch path N A Use this parameter to specify the search paths Image for Windows uses when looking for base images in the backup chain path can use the d p path format to specify the drive and partitio
79. will automatically use the highest speed supported by both the drive and the media in use DVD speeds are approximately 1 8 CD speeds therefore a maximum burning speed of 32X for a CD disc corresponds to 4X for a DVD disc 16X for a CD corresponds to 2X for a DVD and so on Image for Windows User Manual Page 53 of 227 Creating a Differential or Incremental Backup When you create a differential backup Image for Windows compares the condition of the source partition or hard drive to a full backup you identify to determine what changes have occurred on the source partition or hard drive since you created the full backup When you create an incremental backup Image for Windows compares the condition of the source partition or hard drive to the incremental backup or full backup if no incrementals you identify to determine what changes have occurred on the source partition or hard drive since you created the specified incremental backup Note When creating incremental backups remember to limit the chain length to a reasonable number Each backup in the chain requires additional memory to process and adds another potential point of failure Both differential and incremental backups contain only the changed sectors For details on differential and incremental backups see Appendix B Backup Strategies on Page 199 The process for creating a differential or incremental backup is very similar to the process for creating
80. you disconnect and reconnect the disk or add delete partitions on the disk Windows will once again alter the disk signature to prevent duplicates Setting this option to zero will prevent Image for Windows from ensuring the restored copied disk signature is retained Default if omitted Image for Windows will ensure the disk signature is set to the restored copied value even when there are duplicates msg my message Message my message This option applies only to the console version of Image for Windows IMAGEWC EXE and not to the standard version IMAGEW EXE Use this option to specify the text Image for Windows displays while backing up restoring validating or copying If your message text contains spaces place the message text in quotation marks msg my message Use n to force a new line otherwise text wraps to screen width only msg first line nsecond line Default if omitted No message text is displayed uggs 0 UseGlobalGeoSettings 0 Place under the HDx section Use this parameter to disable the use of the global geometry settings for this individual drive This applies to interactive use of global geometry settings Default if omitted Global geometry settings apply to the drive npt NoPartTable 0x10000 Place under the HDx section Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to treat the selected drive as a drive that doesn t use a partition table If you use this option on t
81. 0 Click Close on the MakeDisk Success screen QuickStart Making a Backup To make a full backup of a drive or partition using Image for Windows follow these steps Note For detailed steps on creating a full backup see the section Creating Backups with Image for Windows on Page 26 1 Click Start All Programs Terabyte Unlimited Image for Windows V2 Image for Windows or you can double click the Image for Windows Desktop shortcut 2 Select Backup Full and click Next 3 Select a drive or partition to back up 4 Select the target location where you want to store the backup image file s 5 Provide a name for the backup image file 6 Set backup options For details on available backup options see the section Setting Backup Options on Page 48 You can make a differential or incremental backup using the same steps you simply select the Changes Only option on the Image for Windows menu instead of the Full Backup option For details on backup strategies that is deciding whether to make full backups or use a combination of full backups and differential or incremental backups see Appendix B Backup Strategies on Page 199 For details on creating a differential or incremental backup see the section Creating a Differential or Incremental Backup on Page 54 QuickStart Restoring an Image You can restore an Image for Windows backup using these steps Image for Windows User Manual Page 12 of
82. 0x4 nvn Win8 Copy Default if omitted The volume name will not be changed from its copied value ohd UseOrgHDNum 1 Use this option to tell Image for Windows to keep references to the source hard drive number intact within the partition after Image for Windows has copied the partition to the target drive This option is primarily used for Linux partitions Default if omitted If the target drive number differs from that of the source drive Image for Windows will update applicable drive references residing within the copied partition to reflect the new hard drive number a SetActive 1 Image for Windows User Manual Page 185 of 227 Use this parameter to make the partition you copy active Default if omitted Image for Windows does not make the copied partition active unless no other partitions are active and the target partition is on HDO t WriteMBR 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows install standard MBR code after completing the copy operation Standard MBR code is the code that boots the active partition Default if omitted Image for Windows does not write standard MBR code unless the MBR is empty e UseSameMBREntry 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows move the partition table entry of the copied partition to the same location in the master partition table as it appeared on the source drive Default if omitted Image for Windows does not move the partition table of the co
83. 12 Click Close on the MakeDisk Success screen If you selected the 31 Floppy CD DVD or USB SD option in Step 10 you can now use that media to boot and run Image for DOS If you selected the ISO File option in Step 10 you will have to use CD DVD authoring software to create a bootable disc from the ISO file TeraByte s BurnCDCC utility can be used for this Tip Be sure to test your boot media to make sure that it works and you can see backup images you made previously Image for Windows User Manual Page 73 of 227 Navigating the Image for DOS Interface After you boot your computer with your Image for DOS boot media the main menu of Image for DOS appears Image for DOS GUI is shown below Image for DOS GUI 2 67 Welcome to Image for DOS Please choose which operation you would like to perform at this time Select Operation Backup Restore Validate Copy To select menu items in Image for DOS use the arrow keys to select the desired option and then press Enter to display the next screen Some screens such as the Restore Options screen contain several sections of options some of which can be toggled on or off On these screens use the Tab key to move from section to section For options that you can toggle on and off highlight the option using the arrow keys and then use the space bar to toggle the option on or off as desired Image for DOS also makes wide u
84. 2 9 35 49 PM J SRECYCLE BIN 3 15 2012 9 12 20 PM _ di System Volume Information 11 10 2012 9 48 27 PM i di Temp 9 27 2012 5 17 47 PM TeraByte Unlimited E TBI Filename 35 09GiB Free Backup w0 0x2 YYYY S MM S DD S HHMMS imi Tip If you want you can manually delete existing image files from the window shown above Simply select the file s you wish to delete and then press the Delete key Please keep in mind that by default only TBI files appear in the window even if an image has additional files associated with it i e 1 2 etc To view such files enter a file name mask without quotes in the Filename text box and then press Enter For example you can type backup to view all files with a name of backup and any extension including TBI 1 or 2 Or you can simply type to view all files on the target disk 7 Click Next In the window that appears set the options you want Image for Windows to use during the backup See the section Setting Backup Options on Page 48 for an explanation of each option 8 Ifyou are backing up to disc media CD DVD BD insert a blank disc 9 On the Summary screen that appears select Start when you are ready to begin the backup process A progress bar appears on screen You can interrupt the backup and validation operations at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing the Esc key Image for Windows will ask you to confirm that you want to canc
85. AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS ACTIONS LOSSES COSTS JUDGMENTS AND DAMAGES OF ANY KIND IN CONNECTION WITH USE IN RELATION TO ANY HIGH RISK ACTIVITY OF ANY COPY OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE RELATING TO THIS LICENSE 7 RESTRICTED RIGHTS COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE The parties acknowledge and agree that a any and all products covered by this Agreement are and shall be deemed commercial computer software for all purposes in relation to U S government acquisition laws rules and regulations and b all use duplication and disclosure by for or on behalf of the U S Government is subject to all conditions limitations and restrictions applicable to commercial computer software as set forth in FAR section 12 212 and in DFAR sections 227 7202 1 227 7202 3 and 227 7202 4 8 GENERAL a ENTIRE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between you and TeraByte in regard to the subject matter herein and supersedes all previous and contemporaneous agreements proposals and communications written or oral between you and TeraByte No amendment of this Agreement shall be effective unless it is in writing and signed by duly authorized representatives of both parties b NON WAIVER Waiver by TeraByte of any violation of any provision of this License shall not be deemed to waive any further or future violation of the same or any other provision c LAW AND JURISDICTION This License and any dispute relating to the Evaluation Softw
86. ANCEL Use this command to enable or disable statistics being automatically sent at regular intervals Specify the number of seconds to enable sending or zero or omit number to disable R_AUTO 20 Statistics will be sent every 20 seconds R_AUTO Automatic sending of statistics will be disabled Sending this command will cancel the current operation When the operation has finished Image for Windows will report COMPLETED n where nis the completion code For example COMPLETED Usage examples imagew b v d w0 f e MainDrive msvr Officel imagew v f g backups data msvr localhost mport 45332 imagew b d w0 0x1 f i systembk msvr 192 168 0 154 Default if omitted Image for Windows will not try to connect to a server mport n MPort n Image for Windows User Manual Page 145 of 227 Use this option to specify the port to use with msvr For example to use port 45332 imagew b d w0 0xl f mybackup msvr MyServer mport 45332 Default if omitted Port 54313 will be used novss N A Use this option to specify that Image for Windows will not attempt to use VSS even if it s enabled or specified on the command line This option overrides both usevss and vssfso Default if omitted Image for Windows will attempt using VSS per defaults or if set to do so alm AutoLoadMedia 1 Use this option to allow Image for Windows to continue automatica
87. ATING A BAGKUP iat ee E OS A ae ee A 2 ae OY 102 UNDERSTANDING VALIDATION OPTIONS 0ccc ccececeececceeeeceececeueeecuececausecaueeecaeesaneesaaees 105 COPYING PARTITIONS OR DRIVES WITH IMAGE FOR WINDOWS 105 COPYING A PARTITION OR DRIVE 2cccecccececececececececececececucececenececueeusenseeneeeneeeneeenass 105 UNDERSTANDING COPY OPTIONS ccececeececceececececaeeeceucecaueeecuecesaueeaueeeaueeecaueesaaees 109 USING SIMPLE OPERATIONS MODE cccccccecceeccecceecceececceececceceaeececeaes 114 CREATING A BACKUP veeleer ehana Ei Ea EAE AVE iae AE E Epa Eia EEDE 115 RESTORING A BACKUP A E E A E E EE E E 116 VALIDATING A BACKUP renracede n E ANEN AN 117 Sa aE Ar DIB k E ek EE TEN ETE EEE E ETAS 117 DEPLOYING YOUR IMAGE 0 cccecceccceeceeccecceccecceceueeceecaecaeeceeeeeceecueeaeeceeeaes 118 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS ADVANCED CONFIGURATION OPTIONS 121 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS INI FILE 2 ceececeececceeeecececeeeeeceececaueeecuececacecaueeenseeesaneesauees 121 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES 00cccceececceeecceececeeceecececaneeeaneeees 122 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS FILE PATH VARIABLES 02cceeeceeecececececececececececeeeceeeceeeneenees 122 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS AND WINDOWS SERVICES cecceeecececececececececeeeceeeceeeceeeneeeaees 123 RUNNING IMAGE FOR WINDOWS FROM THE COMMAND LINE 124 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS BACKUP OPTIONS 0c cecccecccecccecececeaeceauecaeeeneeeaeeeaeee
88. Alternatively if there are no scheduled backups you can click the Schedule Backup button to schedule the current backup By default it s scheduled to run at 1AM daily Refer to Appendix D Scheduling Backups on page 205 for details Restoring a Backup 1 Select Restore a backup to this computer on the main window and click Next 2 Select the backup you wish to restore and then click Next Keep in mind that you can t restore the current Windows drive while Windows is running you ll need to use the boot media to perform the restore While on this screen you can select to view or mount a backup using TBIView or TBlIMount If using a mouse right click the backup and then select the desired action from the pop up menu If using the keyboard select the desired backup Image for Windows User Manual Page 116 of 227 and then press F5 to open with TBIView or F9 to open with TBIMount Select the backup file to restore Backup Backups from this computer Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT126M4SSD2 Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT128M4SSD2 Select Target Drive Manually Completion Date Time 10 30 2015 4 22 PM ig Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT128M4SSD2 4 28 2015 11 42 PM 4 28 2015 11 03 PM lt Check the Select Target Drive Manually option if you wish to select the drive yourself instead of having the original drive automatically selected You will be prompted to make your selection in the next step 3 I
89. CENSE f in addition to the standard Software license you purchased an Image Deployment license as indicated on your sales receipt from TeraByte then A you may make an unlimited number of Images on any Computer System on which you may use the Software under this license Image for Windows User Manual Page 225 of 227 and B you may deploy each Image to other Computer Systems referred to as deployment computers each such deployment computer having been provided an Image Deployment license Image Deployment licenses remain allocated to such deployment computers until and unless such deployment computer is taken out of service and replaced In such case said Image Deployment license may be transferred to such replacement system subject to limitations as provided in subsection 1 a iii above For the right to distribute Images to additional computers you will need to purchase additional Image Deployment License rights from TeraByte Images deployed as described herein may only be restored or referenced on Computer Systems having been licensed with at least an Image Deployment license and once restored may not be moved to any Computer System not so licensed without prior authorization from TeraByte f PARTITION MANAGEMENT LICENSING If the Software s functionality as licensed includes the ability to create resize slide or otherwise manage partitions on a hard drive or otherwise to control or repair system boot parameters t
90. CT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF INCOME USE OR INFORMATION RELATING EITHER TO THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR YOUR RELATIONSHIP WITH TERABYTE EVEN IF TERABYTE Image for Windows User Manual Page 226 of 227 HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS Any suit or other legal action relating in any way to this Agreement or to the Software must be filed or commenced no later than one 1 year after it accrues You may also have other rights which vary from state to state 6 HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES The Software is not fault tolerant and is not designed manufactured or intended for use on equipment or software running in hazardous environments requiring fail safe performance including but not limited to the operation of nuclear facilities aircraft navigation or communication systems air traffic control direct life support machines or weapons systems in which the failure of the Software could contribute to death personal injury or severe physical or environmental damage High Risk Activities TERABYTE AND ITS SUPPLIERS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS OF THE SOFTWARE FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES TERABYTE DOES NOT AUTHORIZE USE OF THE SOFTWARE FOR ANY HIGH RISK ACTIVITY YOU AGREE TO DEFEND AND INDEMNIFY TERABYTE AND HOLD TERABYTE HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS ACTIONS LOSSES COSTS JUDGMENTS AND DAMAGES OF ANY K
91. D while restoring a backup image with n being a positive integer e g 2 4 16 etc This setting may be used to force a lower reading speed than that automatically used by the optical drive s firmware Slower reading speeds may increase reliability nshould be a positive integer e g 2 4 16 etc This setting is only applicable when you are restoring from disc media and you have also included the v option Image for Windows User Manual Page 171 of 227 The maximum reading speed that is actually used is determined by whichever is lower The cdrs n value that you specify or the speed deemed appropriate by the drive s firmware according to the disc media in use For example if you are using media that is rated at 32X for reading the maximum reading speed will be no more than 32X regardless of the setting you choose here Similarly if you supply a value that is invalid for or beyond the drive s design limits the drive will automatically use the next highest speed supported by both the drive and the media in use DVD speeds are approximately 1 8 CD speeds so if you are using DVD discs multiply the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use here For example to obtain a maximum reading speed of 4X with a DVD use cdrs 32 since 8 x 4X 32 Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the Optimal speed setting iobs IOBS 1 Include this option to try to improve I O performance in cases where network
92. Defaults section Table 3 Image for Windows Required Backup Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable b N A Use this option to indicate that you want to perform a backup Also required Either d option to specify a full backup or base option for differential or incremental backup and the f option to specify target image file destination d N A Use when performing a full backup to identify the source hard drive and partition For most users the partition ID will be a number from 1 through 4 For partition IDs of 9 or below you can use a single digit in place of hexadecimal notation e g 1 is equivalent to 0x1 and 5 is equivalent to 0x5 The volume ID will be a number formatted as OxPVV where Pis the extended partition and VV is the volume number in hexadecimal from 01 to FF If you are not sure what the partition or volume ID is run Image for Windows using the interface choose the Backup option and click Next The screen that lists the partitions Image for Windows User Manual Page 152 of 227 and volumes also will display the ID in parentheses as a hexadecimal number You should prefix that number with a 0x on the command line d d p d wd p d D d ntsig d GUID d is the source hard drive number p is the source partition or volume ID hex or decimal notation depending on whether you are referring to a partition or a volume D is the source drive letter NT Disk S
93. E HARD DRIVE DATA ORGANIZATION 0ecceceeeeceeeeeeeeeees 202 APPENDIX D SCHEDULING BACKUPS 0 cc ccc ccccecccecceeccecceceeeececceceaeeceeens 205 APPENDIX E RESTORING TO A SMALLER DRIVE OR PARTITION 209 PREPARING FOR THE MOVE 0ccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeecaeecaeecaueceeaueceeseeeseeesueesneesaeeens 210 EXAMPEES cok eens cece tice EENE EER beste EEEE edge cash on eel lee sh ae eel ats eee st ae E 215 GLOSSARY oe eeccccccccecccecccececceceeeecuecueecuecueeaueceecaeeauecaeeaueceecaesseeceeeaueceectesaeesaees 218 Image for Windows User Manual Page 4 of 227 WHAT AS SHAREWARE a setts ccd cnthindiancntntdentdadleadinedcnad tues daatanas nad cnas duces 220 TERABYTE UNLIMITED TRIAL USE LICENSE AGREEMENT 05 221 TERABYTE UNLIMITED FULL USE LICENSE AGREEMENT 00 224 Image for Windows User Manual Page 5 of 227 System Requirements Any of the following operating systems including x64 and server versions are supported Windows 8 Windows 7 Windows 2008 Windows Vista Windows XP Windows 2003 Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows Millennium Windows 98 These operating systems require Administrator privileges to install and run Image for Windows x64 versions of Windows are supported AMD64 EM64T Recommended External hard drive Note You can use a writable CD DVD or BD drive but an external hard drive is the preferred method I
94. Examples space Default values will be used for f 192 168 0 16 port sessionname and password if not f N OfficeServer Win8 Clean pswd SPecified server Specify the system running the multicasting server port Specify the port to use The default is port 54312 sessionname Specify the session name No session name is used if omitted password Specify the password for the session Omit if no password is required Table 5 describes options required to restore a backup using Image for Windows from the command line Table 6 lists optional restore parameters for both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Restore_Defaults section unless as noted otherwise Table 6 Image for Windows Optional Restore Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable o N A Use this option to tell Image for Windows to overwrite the target without first prompting for confirmation Default if omitted Image for Windows prompts before overwriting the target base N A Note Beginning with Image for Windows 2 78 this parameter is optional when restoring a differential or incremental backup and should normally be omitted Instead use the sch option if it s necessary to specify the location of
95. GeoAlignVal n This option allows you to specify a custom partition alignment value for all drives For example to align partitions on 2MiB boundaries use geoav 2M or GlobalGeoAlignVal 2M Invalid sizes will be ignored This option overrides the other Image for Windows User Manual Page 137 of 227 interactive alignment options This option only applies to interactive sessions it does not apply to command line restores Default if omitted This option is not set a custom alignment value will not be used geombr GlobalGeoMBRGeo 1 This option is used to prevent problems where users restore an image from another system to a drive that will be put back in the other system For example the hard drive from PC A is backed up PC B is used to restore to a new hard that new drive is placed back in PC A Without this option enabled Image for Windows would setup the partition to properly boot on the hard drive for PC B which can sometimes not always be a problem when the hard drive is going back to PC A This option solves that and is equivalent to the individual Use MBR Geometry override This option only applies to interactive sessions it does not apply to command line restores Default if omitted This option is Disabled geombrv GlobalGeoMBRGeoValidate 1 This option is used to ensure that the geometry from the MBR on the original system is aligned to known standards before accepting it for use It only applies when gemomb
96. IND IN CONNECTION WITH USE IN RELATION TO ANY HIGH RISK ACTIVITY OF ANY COPY OF THE SOFTWARE RELATING TO THIS LICENSE 7 RESTRICTED RIGHTS COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE The parties acknowledge and agree that a any and all products covered by this Agreement are and shall be deemed commercial computer software for all purposes in relation to U S government acquisition laws rules and regulations and b all use duplication and disclosure by for or on behalf of the U S Government is subject to all conditions limitations and restrictions applicable to commercial computer software as set forth in FAR section 12 212 and in DFAR sections 227 7202 1 227 7202 3 and 227 7202 4 8 GENERAL a ENTIRE AGREEMENT This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between you and TeraByte in regard to the subject matter herein and supersedes all previous and contemporaneous agreements proposals and communications written or oral between you and TeraByte No amendment of this Agreement shall be effective unless it is in writing and signed by duly authorized representatives of both parties b NON WAIVER Waiver by TeraByte of any violation of any provision of this License shall not be deemed to waive any further or future violation of the same or any other provision c LAW AND JURISDICTION This License and any dispute relating to the Software or to this License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the laws of the State of
97. IP drives etc as required Note that ejecting USB flash drives may make them unavailable to Windows until disconnected and reconnected This option applies only when the noej NoEject 1 option is not used Default if omitted Image for Windows will eject only optical media as required bold 0 Bold 0 Disables using bold fonts on certain radio buttons tree views and list views Image for Windows User Manual Page 141 of 227 Default if omitted Bold fonts will be used except under TBWinRE PE where bold fonts will not be used uwts 0 UseWindowsFS 0 Disables allowing Image for Windows to back up or copy used areas of certain File Systems supported by Windows but not directly by Image for Windows Default if omitted Allows Image for Windows to back up or copy used areas of certain File Systems supported by Windows but not directly by Image for Windows While it s able to access only used areas for a smaller and faster backup or copy it does not allow resizing or file exclusions of those volumes As of this writing ReFS is the only file system supported by this option simple Simple 1 Use this option to enable the Simple Operations mode Image for Windows will automatically handle most options for you For example to back up a drive you simply choose which physical drive you want to back up and if needed which drive you want to save to Backups are saved to a store on the destination drive e g E Ter
98. If you do not select this option and the target drive number differs from that of the source drive applicable drive references residing within the restored partitions will be updated to reflect the new hard drive number This option has no effect if you are restoring to a target drive whose number matches that of the source drive If you are restoring to a target drive whose number differs from that of the source drive but you plan to subsequently move the target drive so that its number matches the source drive again enabling this option can be beneficial Scale to Target If you use this option when restoring an image Image for DOS restores the image proportionally to the target drive For example suppose that you backed up a 250 GB hard drive and restored the image to a 500 GB hard drive If you use this option you allow Image for DOS to double the size of the restored image This option only works for FAT FAT32 NTFS and EXT2 3 4 file systems and has no effect on images restored to hard drives using other file systems You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to Fit option If you inadvertently enable both options Scale to Fit will take precedence Ignore IO Errors Under ordinary circumstances if Image for DOS encounters a bad sector on the target partition while restoring Image for DOS will notify you concerning the write error and give you the option to continue or abort If you select the Ignore IO Errors opti
99. Incremental backups include only data that has changed since the most recent backup was performed whether the most recent backup was a full backup or a previous incremental backup To use this backup method you perform a full backup at an interval of your choice say every two weeks In between full backups you Image for Windows User Manual Page 199 of 227 perform incremental backups If you need to restore your entire system you need to restore the latest full backup followed by each of the incremental backups you performed since that full backup unless the backup program being used supports a complete restore in one restore procedure For example suppose that you are relying on file based backups and you perform a full backup that includes FILE1 FILE2 and FILE3 Then you change FILE2 and you perform an incremental backup This incremental backup will include only the data of FILE2 since you did not change the other files in the most recent full backup Then if you change FILE3 and add FILE4 and make another incremental backup the latest incremental backup will include only data from FILE3 and FILE4 If you are relying on sector based backups you perform a full backup at an interval of your choice and in between you perform incremental backups But an incremental sector based backup is not based on files that have been added or changed Instead an incremental sector based backup looks for and includes newly allocated sectors a
100. KSTART MAKING A BACKUP cecceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeecaeecaeecaeecaeeseeeseesaeeseeeseesaeeens 12 QUICKSTART RESTORING AN IMAGE 0eccceeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeecaeecaeeceeeeaecaeeseeseeeeeeees 12 QUICKSTART VALIDATING AN IMAGE 0eccceeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeecaeeceeecaeeseeseecneesteeseeens 13 OBTAINING IMAGE FOR WINDOWS 2 00 cece ccccecccecceeccecceccceeceecaceceeceeeaeeceeeaes 14 INSTALLING IMAGE FOR WINDOWS e ccc cccceeccecceccceccecceeececcceaseceseeeceeeaees 15 FORMULATING A BACKUP PLAN c cccccecceccceccecceeececceccueeceececcaeeceeeteeaeeeeeens 25 CONSIDER THE DESTINATION FOR YOUR BACKUP 0eccceeceeceeecceeeececeneeeneeeaneeaneeneees 25 PLAN YOUR BACKUP WITH A RESTORE STRATEGY IN MIND 02cceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeees 25 STRIKE YOUR OWN BALANCE BETWEEN CONVENIENCE AND RESILIENCY 26 CREATING BACKUPS WITH IMAGE FOR WINDOWS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 26 CREATING A FULL BACKUP steel eke el ened eb AE de dae dda 26 UNDERSTANDING OPTIONS 00cc0eeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeceeeceeceeeceeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeeseeeneeeness 36 Setting Image for Windows Program Options cccceeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeetaeeeeneeees 36 Setting Backup Options 0 0 ccccceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee eae eeseaeeseeeeseaeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeee 48 Additional Backup Options for Removable Media ccccccceeeceseeeeeeeeeceeeeesseeesnaeeeenees 52 CREATING A DIFFERENTIA
101. L OR INCREMENTAL BACKUP 0ecccceeeeceececeeceecencecaeeseeeeeeaes 54 RESTORING AN IMAGE FILE 0 2 cece cece ceccceccecceeececceeececceseaeececceeaeeceseeeceeeaees 59 RESTORING A BACKUP WITH IMAGE FOR DOS ccececeeeecceeeeceececceeeceecesaueesaeeeesaneeeas 61 Creating a Bootable Image for DOS DISC c ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeee eae eeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeneeee 61 Navigating the Image for DOS Interface 0 eccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeee 74 Restoring the Backpac a teu ceceaudaaagdiga ciees tous a T EA 75 Image for DOS Restore Options for an Entire Drive ceccceceeeeeeseeceeeeeceeeeeesaeeneeeeeees 78 Image for DOS Restore Options for an Individual Partition ccssccccecsseeeeesteeeeeenaes 82 RESTORING A BACKUP WITH IMAGE FOR WINDOWS ccecceeeceeecececececeeeceeeneeeceeeceeenees 85 Using Image for Windows in BartPE eeeccceeeeneeeeeeneeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaa 86 Using Image for Windows to Restore an IMaQe eeececeeeeeeeeeeecteeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeeaa 88 Geometry Settings cii2c eys fes oeetaectesscg ne savccuecddeney en Labcanedsdebenes cua cesteccupesetcaucaeradaebeattensanenddenbes 95 Image for Windows Restore Options c cccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeeaeseeeeeseaeeeenaeeseeeeeaes 97 VALIDATING BACKUPS WITH IMAGE FOR WINDOWS cece cece eeeeee 101 Image for Windows User Manual Page 3 of 227 VALID
102. Lock uses a 8192 KiB 8 MiB memory cache pltr PHYLockThrottleOQnReads 1 Use this option to enable or disable IO throttle on reads Due to fast compression and the design of low level storage drivers you may experience slow response times using applications during backup operations This slowness is actually caused by IO being delayed on slower traditional spinning hard drives and not CPU utilization 1O throttling was introduced to alleviate this condition at the cost of potentially slowing down the backup operation IO throttling is currently only used when PHYLock is active Image for Windows User Manual Page 148 of 227 Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g pltr 0 Default if omitted This option will be enabled pltw PHYLockThrottleQnWrites 1 Use this option to enable or disable IO throttle on writes Due to fast compression and the design of low level storage drivers you may experience slow response times using applications during backup operations This slowness is actually caused by IO being delayed on slower traditional spinning hard drives and not CPU utilization 1O throttling was introduced to alleviate this condition at the cost of potentially slowing down the backup operation IO throttling is currently only used when PHYLock is active Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g pltw 0 Default if omitted This option will be enabled pltd n PHYLockThrottleDelay n Use
103. Mode Exdude Files To Not Backup Use If Locking Fails Exdude Files To Not Snapshot V Lock Unsupported Volumes V Ignore Unsupported Volumes V Use VSS for Simple Operations Co cancel Hee PHYLock is an optional software component for Windows NT 2000 XP 2003 Vista Windows 7 and Windows 8 that enables Image for Windows to create a consistent reliable backup of a partition or volume that is in use based on a point in time To back up a Windows partition while you are using that partition you need to use PHYLock By default PHYLock settings are saved in the registry and may be stored separately for the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of Image for Windows see the command line option altregview for details For example to change a PHYLock setting in both versions you may need to run each version and make the setting change Note Image for Windows attempts to pick a clean point in time Like all backup software packages that back up a partition or volume that is in use Image for Windows cannot guarantee that all programs internal caches and other processes are in a clean state If you don t enable any of the options listed below then Image for Windows will use PHYLock if you installed it Disable Usage Check this box if you do not want to use PHYLock even if you installed it Image for Windows User Manual Page 42 of 227 Use If Locking Fails Check this box to have Ima
104. NoLock 1 Use this option to attempt a normal lock and only add the partition to the VSS snapshot if locking fails The partition remains locked during the backup or copy operation Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g vssifn 0 When disabled a normal lock will not be attempted first The partition will be added to the VSS snapshot This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Default if omitted This option will be disabled vssfso VSSForSimpleOperations 1 Use this option to attempt using VSS for the backup or copy when Simple Operations mode is enabled The Exclude Files options uftnb and uftns are automatically used with Simple Operations when VSS is used Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g vssfso 0 and prevent VSS from being used with Simple Operations mode without needing to use the novss option Note If novss is used no attempt will be made to use VSS even if this option is enabled Default if omitted This option will be enabled Image for Windows Backup Options In Table 3 you find the command line options that you must set to use Image for Windows to make a backup image The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Backup_
105. RIGHTS AT ANY TIME FOR ANY OR NO REASON c YOU MAY NOT i permit others to use the Evaluation Software unless they are properly licensed by TeraByte either under this Agreement or another agreement from TeraByte ii modify translate reverse engineer decompile disassemble or create derivative works based on the Evaluation Software iii copy the Evaluation Software except as expressly permitted above iv distribute the Evaluation Software bundle it with other products rent lease sell grant a security interest in or otherwise transfer rights to or possession of the Evaluation Software or any copy thereof except as may be expressly provided in this Agreement v remove or alter any proprietary notices labels or legends on any copy of the Evaluation Software or vi ship or transmit directly or indirectly any copies of the Evaluation Software or their media or any direct product thereof to any country or destination prohibited by the United States Government d RESERVATION OF RIGHTS All rights and licenses not expressly granted by TeraByte in this Agreement are entirely and exclusively reserved to TeraByte 2 TERM AND TERMINATION This Agreement shall remain effective until this Agreement is terminated provided that in no event shall your evaluation rights hereunder extend beyond the thirty 30 day period set forth in Section 1 above You may terminate it at any time by destroying the distribution media tog
106. Restore Validate and Copy operations are available in this mode Refer to Using Simple Operations Mode on page 114 for details Selecting Simple also allows the installer to automatically control the installation options Selecting Traditional will run Image for Windows in normal mode with all options available You will also be able to configure the installation options Image for Windows User Manual Page 16 of 227 5 Setup Image for Windows V2 Mode Selection Image for Windows can operate in simple or traditional mode Select the operating mode Simple Allow program control most operations and options Traditional You have control over operations and options 4 Click Next If you selected Simple in the previous step proceed to Step 9 Otherwise the Point In Time Technology screen is displayed 5 Setup Image for Windows V2 JLo Point In Time Technology Image for Windows can use VSS or PHYLock Select the default point in time technology to use VSS Microsoft s Volume Shadow Services C PHYLock TeraByte s PHYLock Image for Windows User Manual Page 17 of 227 Select the Point In Time technology to use VSS Enables the use of Microsofts Volume Shadow Services VSS VSS is supported on Windows 2003 or later PHYLock Enables the use of TeraByte s PHYLock PHYLock enables Image for Windows to create a consistent reliable backup of a par
107. SS is enabled and used Exclude Files To Not Snapshot If you have configured the VSS FilesNotToSnapshot registry key you can enable this option to have Image for Windows exclude those files folders when creating a backup image or copying a partition This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Lock Unsupported Volumes Enable to have Image for Windows attempt to lock a partition when its volume name is in a format unsupported by VSS If the lock fails and the Ignore Unsupported Volumes option is enabled the partition will be ignored Otherwise PHYLock may be used This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Ignore Unsupported Volumes Enable to have Image for Windows ignore a partition when its volume name is in a format unsupported by VSS The partition will be backed up or copied in the unlocked state If any changes are made to the data on the partition during the operation and Validate Byte for Byte is used the validation will fail This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Additionally it will be used for applicable Simple Operations mode procedures if enabled Use Component Mode Enabling this option will only enable VSS components that are needed based on the partitions being backed up or copied When disabled all components are used automatically Image for Windows User Manual Page 45 of 227 Use If Locking Fails Attempt a normal lock and only add the partition to the VSS sna
108. Tereabute PROVEN SOFTWARE SOLUTIONS Image for Windows User Manual TeraByte Unlimited Las Vegas Nevada USA http www terabyteunlimited com Revision 2015 10 31 Copyright 1996 2015 by TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Trademarks Bootlt BING TBOS PHYLock TBScript TBIMount and TBIView are trademarks of TeraByte Inc Microsoft MS MS DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM PC DOS and OS 2 are registered trademarks of the International Business Machines Corporation All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective owners Technical Support Policy Technical support is provided online Software and documentation updates are available at www terabyteunlimited com The Image for Windows home page with software and documentation update information and support resources can be found at www terabyteunlimited com image for windows htm A support knowledge base for all TeraByte Unlimited products including Image for Windows can be found at www terabyteunlimited com kb Registered users can email their questions to support terabyteunlimited com if you can t find a suitable resolution via the aforementioned support resources If we cannot resolve the issue via email we may provide telephone support Unregistered users will be provided technical support and product information through email only In all cases TeraByt
109. The source drive s required space for restore is 220GB e A backup image of the source drive has been created SOURCE TB e The destination drive is either a 128GB or 256GB SSD drive Image for Windows User Manual Page 215 of 227 Example 1 Normal Restore For the purpose of this text a normal restore is one which requires no compacting resizing or special steps to accomplish prior to restoring This type of restore can be used any time the required space for the restore is less than the available space on the destination drive even if the source partition is actually much larger Using the example configuration SOURCE TBI can be restored normally to the 256GB SSD since it requires only 220GB It would not be possible to do a normal restore to the 128GB SSD due to insufficient available space When restoring an OS partition or disk image entire drive any standard options necessary to ensure proper booting would also apply here Set Active Update BOOT INI Update Boot Partition Restore First Track etc Additionally when restoring a disk image and the source drive was larger than the destination the Scale to Target or Scale to Fit option must be selected Otherwise the program will report that there s not enough space on the destination drive even if there is Example 2 Compact Resize Image and Restore Using the example configuration restoring an image of the 465GB partition to the 128GB SSD could be pe
110. This option will not work with some drives therefore if you enable this option and have problems using your CD DVD drive with Image for DOS recreate the boot media and leave the option disabled Disable SATA Image for DOS includes low level support for SATA when the SATA controller is configured in AHCI mode If the BIOS doesn t provide enough information to allow Image for DOS to identify the SATA drives when Image for DOS takes control of the SATA drives Image for DOS may default to using the BIOS drive in this case the system will hang until the BIOS returns control if ever If you experience hangs and or the inability to access a hard drive without an error message recreate the boot media with the Disable SATA checkbox checked Disable SATA Bias Because some systems have no support whatsoever to match BIOS and SATA drives see paragraph above Image for DOS employs a special matching routine to try to identify the BIOS drives that relate to each SATA drive In some cases Image for DOS might inadvertently match a BIOS drive to a SATA drive incorrectly If you experience such an issue recreate the boot media with the Disable SATA Bias checkbox checked Image for Windows User Manual Page 66 of 227 6 USB 1 1 UHCI If you need USB 1 1 UHCI support for older systems that don t support USB 2 0 enable this option In addition some new systems require this option or the USB port will hang and Image for DOS won
111. UR OWN COMPUTER i YOU MAY use the Evaluation Software for evaluation purposes in your own computer for a period not to exceed thirty 30 days after your first installation or use of the Evaluation Software You may not re install or additionally install the Evaluation Software for additional evaluation periods ii Not Free Software This Evaluation Software is not free software but a software copy with limited license rights as set forth in this Agreement iii Temporary Evaluation Use Only You may use this Evaluation Software without charge for a limited time only and solely to decide whether to purchase a paid license for the software from TeraByte If you wish to use the Evaluation Software after the thirty 30 day evaluation period then you must purchase a Full Use license for the software from TeraByte You can visit TeraByte s web site at www terabyteunlimited com for further information iv NO CONTINUED USE WITHOUT REGISTRATION Unregistered use of the Evaluation Software after the thirty 30 day trial period is an infringement of TeraByte s legal and equitable rights including but not limited to copyright and trade secret rights under U S and international laws v Notwithstanding the above should you use install copy or download the Evaluation Software for a particular purpose and should the Evaluation Software successfully accomplish that particular purpose such use shall not be considered evaluation purposes
112. Use MBR Geometry is enabled Use Original Geometry Use the drive geometry saved in the backup file as opposed to the drive geometry of the machine where you re restoring the backup Note Suppose that you move a drive from Machine A to Machine B and then back up Machine A s drive using Machine B If you then restore this backup and select the Use Original Geometry option Image for Windows restores the backup using the geometry from Machine B Align on End Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to align restored partitions at the end of a cylinder or when the Align on 1MiB Boundaries option is enabled at the end of a 1MiB boundary Align End by Resizing Use this option to make Image for Windows align both the beginning and end of a partition by resizing This option works only on partitions that Image for Windows can resize Align on 1MiB Boundaries Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to align restored partitions on 1MiB boundaries drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors Align MBR Ending HS Use this option to make Image for Windows force a restored partition s ending head and sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry Align MBR HS when Truncated Use this option to make Image for Windows set a restored partition s head and sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry when
113. Win7 SRP 2012 03 16 TBI 410 MiB 3 16 2012 9 35 49 PM J J SRECYCLE BIN 3 45 2012 9 12 20 PM F d System Volume Information 11 10 2012 9 48 27 PM J Temp 9 27 2012 5 17 47 PM E TBI Filename 35 27GiB Free 5 Click Next In the window that appears select the drive or partition to restore Image for Windows User Manual Page 90 of 227 i Image for Windows 2 86 Select the drive or partition s to restore M HD 40960 MiB FD2C4742 p H System Reserved 100 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 active l JM H Win7 38810 MiB HPFS NTFS 02 iJ Recovery 2047 MiB HPFS NTFS 03 While on this screen the following function is available e Information Click to view the details of the selected drive or partition e g number of MiB used free and needed to restore Image for Windows User Manual Page 91 of 227 6 Click Next In the window that appears select the drive or partition where you want to restore the backup file 4 Image for Windows 2 86 a Select where to restore the partition s Computer B S HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 System Reserved 100 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 active C Win7 38810 MiB HPFS NTFS 02 Recovery 2047 MiB HPFS NTFS 03 2 MiB Free Space 80 HD 1 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 E Data 40957 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 H 2 MiB Free Space 80 HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E T 40959 MiB Free Space 80 C V
114. a CD DVD BD an alternate hard drive partition or an external hard drive you can restore by booting your computer using a recovery boot media you create using either Image for DOS or Image for Linux That boot media automatically contains a copy of Image for DOS Image for Linux that you can use to restore your Image for Windows backup If you prefer to restore with Image for Windows you can create the TBWinRE TBWinPE or BartPE boot media When you boot your computer using this boot media you boot to a Windows preinstallation environment where you can use Image for Windows to restore your backup Tutorials for creating the TBWinRE TBWinPE and BartPE boot media can be found on TeraByte s website Using either approach your Image product can recognize USB USB2 IEEE 1394 eSATA and ATAPI devices where you have stored backup files without any interference on your part Image for Windows and Image for Linux also support USB3 devices Note Image can also recognize ASPI devices if you provide the ASPI driver Image for Windows User Manual Page 25 of 227 Strike Your Own Balance between Convenience and Resiliency Consider these simple ideas Save your backups directly to an alternate hard drive partition or external hard drive and then use the free utility BINGBURN to burn a secondary copy of the backup to a set of CD DVD BD discs Then if you need to restore you can quickly and conveniently use the backup stored on the
115. aByte_TBI_ Backups The storage area is maintained automatically with backups being deleted as needed when space runs out Only Backup Restore and Validate operations are available in this mode When using the command line only backing up is supported To use Simple Operations mode when backing up from the command line use the d parameter to specify the drive to back up and optionally use the f parameter to specify the storage drive path must be root path Do not specify a base image or any filenames To specify the maximum number of incremental backups you want in each chain use the mi parameter Once a backup of a drive has been saved to a store it s normally not necessary to specify the store when later backups are run since the existing store will be located automatically Note Specifying unsupported parameters or values will cause Image for Windows to ignore the Simple Operations mode request Normal mode will be used Examples imagew b simple d w0 f E imagew b simple mi 3 d wl f G imagew64 b simple d 1 f w3 0x2 imagew64 b vb simple d 0 mi 10 f Server share Default if omitted Image for Windows will function in Normal mode mi n MaxIncrementals n Use this option to specify the maximum number of incremental backups in each chain when using Simple Operations mode simple When the specified number is reached a Image for Windows User Manual Page 142 of 227
116. ace of hexadecimal notation e g 1 is equivalent to 0x1 and 5 is equivalent to 0x5 The volume ID will be a number formatted as OxPVV where Pis the extended partition and VV is the volume number in hexadecimal from 01 to FF If you are not sure of the partition or volume ID number run Image for Windows using the interface choose the Backup option and click Next The screen that lists the partitions and volumes also will display the ID in parentheses as a hexadecimal number You should prefix that number with a 0x on the command line sd d p sd wd p sd D sd ntsig p sd GUID p d is the source hard drive number p is the source partition or volume ID hex or decimal notation depending on whether you are referring to a partition or a volume D is the source drive letter NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the sd and before the source hard drive number w Windows device Image for Windows User Manual Page 182 of 227 v Virtual drive Drive letter follows td N A Use this option to identify the target hard drive and partition For most users the partition ID will be a number from 1 through 4 For partition IDs of 9 or below you can use a single digit in place of hexadecimal notation e g 1 is equivalent to 0x1 and 5 is equivalent to 0x5 The volume ID will be
117. ackup you must first restore the image to a drive large enough to contain it so it can be compacted or resized and then reimaged or copied Also note that you can t compact a partition that s in use for example you can t compact the booted Windows partition You would need to boot to Image for DOS Image for Linux or Image for Windows in WinPE To compact a partition Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice Select to create a backup On the partition selection screen highlight the partition that needs compacted Click the Compact button graphical versions or press F3 console versions Enter the new size arwn gt To resize a partition Boot into Bootlt Bare Metal Enter Partition Work Select the partition than needs resized Click the Resize button Enter the new size akwns The time required to compact or resize a partition depends on the amount of data that must be moved and the speed of the system Examples Several examples of restoring to a smaller drive or partition are shown below e Example 1 Normal Restore e Example 2 Compact Resize Image and Restore For more details and an additional method using robocopy please see the corresponding TeraByte KB article Unless otherwise stated the examples below are using the following base system configuration e The source drive is 500GB with a single 465GB partition containing Windows and 150GB of programs and data e
118. aeeenneanees 152 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS RESTORE OPTIONS sececceeeeceececceeeceucecseeeecencesaueeeateeesaeeeens 163 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS VALIDATE OPTIONS cecccecececececececececececececeneeececeneeeneeeneenees 178 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS COPY OPTIONS cccccecececececececececececenececsececenueeneeeneeneeeneeenaes 182 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS LIST OPTIONS cecceceececceeeeceucecaeeeeceececsueeeceucecaueeeueeenaneesaes 192 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS COMBINE OPTIONS ecccceeeeceececceececeececseseeceeeecaueeeaeeeaaeeesaes 194 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 00 ccccecceccceceeeccecceceeeececcueeceececaeecueceeceecueeaueceecueeaeeceeens 197 APPENDIX A UNDERSTANDING THE TYPES OF BACKUPS 5 198 FIFE BASED BACKUPS cenia ceca enc a ek Ee eile a otto lento 198 SECTOR BASED BACKUP cccccecceeeceeeceeeceeeceeecececeeeceeeceeceeececeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeneeeneeeness 198 APPENDIX B BACKUP STRATEGIES c ccccccccecceecceccececeececeatececceseaeeceeens 199 FULL BACKUPS sx hnAscite eves Adee ch eave Abe th ee ten ied Ag eon ere deere Adee 199 INCREMENTAL BACKUPS cececceeecceececeeeecceececececaeeeecaucesaueeecauecaueesaeeesaueesauetenaneesaes 199 DIFFERENTIAL BAGKUPS wees fee hansen ost feet ive dil enn ak ele sda eat le olen 200 APPENDIX C INTRODUCTION TO HARD DRIVE STORAGE 00255 202 THE PHYSICAL HARD DRIVE cccccceeecceececeececceeeceucecaeeecucecaueescuneceueesaueesaesecaeeesauees 202 THE LOGICAL HARD DRIV
119. am is run option value 64 Otherwise the 64 bit version of Image for Windows will use the 64 bit registry settings and the 32 bit version will use the 32 bit registry settings ignsvc IgnoreServices 1 Use this option to tell Image for Windows to ignore the services ins configuration file Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the services ins file if it exists usbign n USBlgnoreMask n Use this option to hide certain USB host controllers For example if you have a USB keyboard Image for Windows might disable the keyboard when it takes control of the USB2 host controller Using this option you can hide the host controller of that USB keyboard and attach the USB keyboard to a different controller It usually takes some experimentation to determine which controller to hide but the two USB ports next to each other are usually controlled by the same host controller To hide the first USB controller use usbign 1 and to hide the second USB controller use usbign 2 To hide the third USB controller use usbign 4 To hide both the first and second USB controllers use usbign 3 Note Use a basic Bit Mask numbering scheme Default if omitted Image for Windows takes control of all detected USB2 host controllers cbs 0 ClearBootStatus 0 Use this option to prevent Image for Windows from forcing Windows to assume a clean shutdown on Windows 2008 R2 Vista 7 This applies to copy and restore only Default if omit
120. an use Image for Windows to back up or restore your backup In Bart PE or Vista PE Image for Windows includes the PE Builder Plugin Installer You can use the plugin with the free Bart PE Builder which allows you to build a bootable Windows CD or UFD that also contains Image for Windows BartPE tutorial A VistaPE build can also be created When you boot your computer using this boot media you boot to a Windows preinstallation environment state where you can use Image for Windows to back up or restore your backup Image for Windows Quick Start In this section you ll find a general overview of the major processes Image for Windows can perform making a recovery boot disk that you can use to boot your computer and restore a partition or a hard drive backing up restoring and validating an existing backup image Each of these processes is described in detail including pictures later in this manual Warning to Windows 8 Users You must disable the Windows 8 Fast startup option or you risk corruption of your partitions and data For instructions see System Requirements on page 6 Image for Windows User Manual Page 9 of 227 QuickStart Creating a Recovery Boot Disc Follow the steps in the section Installing Image for Windows on Page 15 to install the product While installing Image for Windows you can also create the Image for DOS recovery boot media that you can use to boot your computer and restore a part
121. aph shall be construed as a consent by TeraByte to any assignment of this agreement except as provided hereinabove h SURVIVAL The provisions of paragraphs 1 a iv 1 c ii and 3 of this Agreement shall survive any termination or expiration of this Agreement Image for Windows User Manual Page 223 of 227 TeraByte Unlimited Full Use License Agreement Revised April 1 2011 PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE UPGRADING COPYING INSTALLING OR USING THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE PROGRAM the Software THIS AGREEMENT SETS FORTH THE STANDARD FULL USE LICENSE FOR USE OF THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM IN ORDER TO USE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS FULL USE LICENSE YOU MUST PURCHASE OR HAVE PURCHASED EITHER a ONE OR MORE COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE WITH FULL USE LICENSE RIGHTS FROM TERABYTE OR A TERABYTE AUTHORIZED LICENSING AGENT OR b FULL USE LICENSE RIGHTS FROM TERABYTE OR A TERABYTE AUTHORIZED LICENSING AGENT FOR ONE OR MORE TIME LIMITED EVALUATION VERSION COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE ALREADY IN YOUR POSSESSION THERE MAY BE AN ACTIVATION PROCESS DESCRIBED IN THE SOFTWARE PURCHASE RECEIPT OR IN TERABYTE DOCUMENTATION THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE MAY BE LIMITED OR PREVENTED If you do not agree to all of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement as set forth below then a do not install upgrade copy or use the Software b if you received any registration codes or serial numbers
122. aracters in a password if it will be difficult or impossible to enter those characters in Image for Dos or Image for Linux Omit Page File Data If you select this option the page files pagefile sys swapfile sys that reside in the root directory of the source partition will not be backed up If the page files reside anywhere else on the source partition other than the root directory Image for Windows will back them up regardless of this setting Omit Hibernation Data If you select option and the hiberfil sys file resides in the root directory of the source partition Image for Windows will not back up hiberfil sys If hiberfil sys resides anywhere else on the source partition other than the root directory Image for Windows will back it up regardless of this setting Ignore IO Errors This option only affects how Image for Windows handles bad sectors on the source drive and it applies to both the back up phase and the validation phase of the backup operation Normally if Image for Windows encounters a bad sector on a source partition during a backup operation it will abort with an error If you select this option Image for Windows will ignore the error and continue Generally you should select this option only if you need to back up a source partition on a drive you know contains bad sectors On some systems if you select this setting and Image for Windows encounters bad sectors there will be a significant delay as the internal
123. are available in Simple Operations mode Use Windows 9x MBR Windows Vista and later tied the kernel loader to the MBR code such that using previous MBR code may not allow Windows Vista or later to boot on certain machines Leave this option unselected the default to have Image for DOS use the code base compatible with Windows Vista or later The new MBR code will continue to boot older OSes with the exception of some rare configurations using Win9x on FAT32 Disable Automatic Scaling Restrictions Select to have Image for DOS scale small partitions when restoring a full drive image By default small partitions will not be scaled and will be restored at their original sizes Disable Automatic Boot Partition Updates Select to prevent Image for DOS from automatically updating the boot partition when restoring a full drive image Disable Automatic Restore Drive Search Select to prevent Image for DOS from searching for the destination drive using the disk signature or Image for Windows User Manual Page 69 of 227 GUID when performing an automatic restore USB 1394 and virtual drives will not be searched If a match isn t found or if this option is enabled the drive number of the backed up drive will be used Retain Failed Backups If you enable this option and a backup operation fails Image for DOS won t delete the files from the failed backup Completion Alarm Select to enable an audible alarm upon complet
124. are or to this License shall be governed by the laws of the United States and the laws of the State of Nevada without regard to U S or Nevada choice of law rules You agree and consent that jurisdiction and proper venue for all claims actions and proceedings of any kind relating to TeraByte or the matters in this License shall be exclusively in courts located in Las Vegas Nevada If a court with the necessary subject matter jurisdiction over a given matter cannot be found in Las Vegas then jurisdiction for that matter shall be exclusively in a court with the proper jurisdiction as close to Las Vegas as possible and within Nevada if possible d SEVERABILITY If any part or provision of this License is held to be unenforceable for any purpose including but not limited to public policy grounds then you agree that the remainder of the License shall be fully enforceable as if the unenforceable part or provision never existed e NON ASSIGNMENT You may not assign this License without the prior written consent of TeraByte except as part of a sale of all or substantially all of the assets of your business f NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES There are no third party beneficiaries of any promises obligations or representations made by TeraByte herein g HEIRS AND ASSIGNS This Agreement shall be binding on and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs executors administrators successors and assigns of the parties hereto but nothing in this paragr
125. ases you re likely to use a virtual drive with Image for Windows if you want to back up a physical drive and then restore it to the virtual drive of a virtual machine you ve created using VirtualPC VMWare or Hyper V You can add a virtual drive while working in Image for Windows Click the Add Virtual Drive button to display an Open dialog box In the File name box type the name of the virtual drive you want to add and click Open If the virtual drive name you type doesn t exist Image for Windows displays a message asking if you want to create a file for the virtual drive Click Yes and Image for Windows displays this dialog box where you can define the type and size of the virtual drive You can specify the size in bytes by including no letters Or you can specify the size in Mebibytes by supplying an M or in Gibibytes by supplying a G Image for Windows New Virtual Drive Name My Virtual Drive Type VHD Dynamic Expanding v Size 50G e g 1GiB r Cancel Help Note that a new virtual drive must be partitioned and formatted before you can use it However you can restore an image or copy a partition into a new virtual drive without needing to partition or format it first You can create any of the following types of virtual drives e RAW Fixed Size Creates a plain raw file as the virtual drive Its size is fixed and allocated with zeros on creation e VHD Dynamic Expand
126. ation drive contains a 1MiB aligned partition or cylinder alignment if the drive contains a partition which is not 1MiB aligned Otherwise the alignment used is obtained from the image being restored av n AlignVal n Place under the HDx section This option allows you to specify a custom partition alignment value for restored partition s For example to specify that partitions should be aligned on 2MiB boundaries use av 2M or AlignVal 2M Invalid sizes will be ignored This option overrides the other device alignment options Default if omitted This option is not set a custom alignment value will not be used ahs AlignEndHS 1 Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to force a restored partition s ending head and sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry Default if omitted The actual ending head and sector values are used Image for Windows User Manual Page 175 of 227 ahst AlignHSOnTrunc 1 Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to set a restored partition s head and sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry when it is located outside the range of the current geometry Default if omitted The actual ending head and sector values are used mg UseMBRGeo 1 Place under the HDx section Set this parameter to tell Image for Windows to use the geometry based on the MBR entry of the first par
127. ation via the menu interface Default if omitted The Press the lt space bar gt message is not displayed and the restore operation proceeds using the command line att AlignToTarget 1 When restoring a full drive image use this option to instruct Image for Windows to force alignment to the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive For example if the a2k option is also specified the restored drive will be aligned on 1MiB boundaries When restoring a single partition specifying this option will instruct Image for Windows to not adjust the alignment 1MiB partition alignment will be used if the target has it already or not if it doesn t and a partition already exists Default if omitted The alignment used on the target drive will be determined automatically based on the source drive n2ka N A By default Image for Windows automatically uses 1MiB partition alignment when you restore from the command line and the backup contains 1MiB aligned partitions Use this option to instruct Image for Windows not to automatically override normal cylinder based alignment If you don t enable this option and Image for Windows determines that 1MiB partition alignment is needed then Image for Windows enables both the Align2048 and the Image for Windows User Manual Page 174 of 227 AlignEndHS options for the restore Note This option has been deprecated but will remain supported for backwa
128. auto mode by default Image for Windows User Manual Page 67 of 227 and some even don t have an option to turn it off Check the box if you want to disable this option This is equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align MBR Ending HS and Align MBR HS when Truncated However you can disable this option by checking the box Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries This option provides a convenient way to enable 1MiB partition alignment for all drives drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors This is popular with users of SSD type drives It is the equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align on 1MiB Boundaries Align MBR Ending HS Align MBR HS when Truncated and disabling Align on End Assume Same Target System Enable this option to prevent problems where users restore an image from another system to a drive that will be put back in the other system For example the hard drive from PC A is backed up PC B is used to restore to a new hard that new drive is placed back in PC A Without this option enabled Image for Windows would setup the partition to properly boot on the hard drive for PC B which can sometimes not always be a problem when the hard drive is going back to PC A This option solves that and is equivalent to the individual Use MBR Geometry override Use Source Host Geometry This option is the global equivalent to the ind
129. ay end up compacting some partitions and resizing others depending on the particular need at the time Once a partition has been compacted or resized an alternative method would be to copy it directly instead of imaging and restoring Image for Windows User Manual Page 217 of 227 Glossary Hard Drive HD HDD A high capacity non volatile data storage device Hard drives are typically installed inside a computer In addition they are used in many external devices connected via USB eSATA etc Partition A unique area of a hard drive that is allocated for use by a file system A hard drive can contain many partitions File System An organized structure that allows data to be stored and accessed by a filename You can basically think of it as the filing system used by the operating system to store and retrieve your data On a hard drive the file system almost always resides in a partition Volume Generally a volume is considered to be any file system or device that is used to hold data but when using Image for Windows it also represents a specific partition that resides in an extended partition Extended Partition A special type of partition that is divided in to one or more partitions called volumes Drive Letter A single letter that represents a file system in Microsoft operating systems Since a file system on a hard drive is almost always in a partition or volume it also represents a partition or volume Logical Driv
130. backup program being used supports a complete restore in one restore procedure Unlike incremental backups which rely on every other incremental backup in the chain a differential backup relies only on the full backup For example suppose that you are relying on file based backups and you perform a full backup that includes FILE1 FILE2 and FILE3 Then you change FILE2 and you perform a differential backup This differential backup will include only the data of FILE2 since the other files in the most recent full backup have not changed If Image for Windows User Manual Page 200 of 227 you then change FILE3 and perform another differential backup this differential backup will include data from both FILE2 and FILES A differential sector based backup includes any sector that has changed or been allocated since you created the last full backup Differential backups are easy to manage during disaster recovery because you need to restore only the last full backup followed by the last differential backup some programs will restore both the full and differential backup in one restore procedure You don t run as much risk of discovering that a backup is damaged or missing and since you only need to restore two backups at most you are not as likely to restore them in the wrong order By its nature the size of a differential backup grows over time If you wait long enough between full backups your differential backup could become alm
131. be found in Appendix C Introduction to Hard Drive Storage Determining the Space Required When determining the minimum space required to restore a partition it s important to understand that the TeraByte imaging programs restore the partition image as an actual image As explained in the previous section this requires the same space for the data as the source partition since the restored data is not relocated within the destination partition while being written Any resizing of the restored partition takes place after the restore has completed This may differ from non TeraByte imaging programs which may create the smaller destination partition first and then restore the files in the image backup to it The minimum space required to restore a partition can be determined from the source partition from the image file or by attempting to restore the partition image To Check the Source Partition Image for Windows User Manual Page 211 of 227 1 Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice and select to create a backup 2 Proceed though the steps until you get to the screen where you select which partitions to include 3 Highlight the partition and click the Information button in Image for Windows Image for DOS GUI and Image for Linux GUI or press F1 in Image for Windows Console Image for DOS and Image for Linux 4 Along with other details the number of MiB to Restore is displayed This is the minimum space required to
132. be the same as the data that Image for Windows used to create the discs Per disc validation can detect media errors that may have occurred during the disc writing process If Image for Windows detects an error Image for Windows will prompt you to recreate the failed disc Default if omitted If you do not enable this option Image for Windows will notify you of errors only after the backup process completes and you will need to recreate all discs in the backup Idu LimitDiscUsage 1 You can use this option when saving images to a CD or DVD drive This option leaves the last 10 of the disc unused which tends to encounter more data errors Default if omitted lf you do not enable this option Image for Windows will use the entire disc comp n Compression n Specifies how Image for Windows should compress backup files as they are created Valid values for n are 0 through 15 The equivalent n values for the GUI compression options are as follows 0 None 1 Standard 2 Enhanced Size A Enhanced Normal prior to version 2 72 Image for Windows User Manual Page 158 of 227 7 Enhanced Size B Enhanced Slower prior to version 2 72 10 Enhanced Size C Enhanced Slowest prior to version 2 72 11 Enhanced Size D 12 Enhanced Size E 13 Enhanced Size F 14 Enhanced Speed A 15 Enhanced Speed B The Enhanced Size D E F options are faster than Enhanced Size A B C but
133. can select a partition on the hard drive if it contains partitions otherwise press Enter Image for DOS GUI 2 67 Select File Drive Hard Drive 0 Hard Drive 1 Sh TeraByte Unlimited 6 Onthe Restore From File Name screen that appears navigate to and select the backup file you want to restore Next select either the entire drive or partitions to restore The options you can set in Step 9 change depending on your choice here You can click the Information button to get details on the selected drive or partition e g number of MiB used free and needed to restore Note If you select a differential or incremental backup to restore and Image for DOS is unable to locate any of the base images you will be prompted to locate the required backup file s You will also have the option to restore in a single pass or in multiple passes If you stored your backup on disc media CD DVD BD select the Multi Pass option 7 On the Restore To Select Drive Interface screen that appears select the access method you wish to use for the source hard drive The choices on this screen are the same as the choices described under Step 4 if you chose File Direct Image for Windows User Manual Page 77 of 227 8 Onthe Restore To Select Target Drive screen that appears select the hard drive onto which you want to restore the image you selected in Step 6 Then select the partition on that drive T
134. ch 2 Enable relaxed criteria and also ignore the disk signature Note Specifying relax is equivalent to relax 1 Default if omitted Image for Windows does not relax the criteria it uses to detect the full backup source drive quit N A Use this option to cancel any operation before it occurs Anything prior to the operation beginning still occurs This is useful for processing a global command line option without bringing up the user interface Image for Windows will return 1 if no error Otherwise an error code for the failure will be returned e g quit is used with login and the log in fails Default if omitted The operation is not canceled savename varname WA This option is used to save the main file name used on a successful backup restore or validate operation to the registry You can then use the varname given on this option as a file path variable on the same computer See Image for Windows File Path Variables section for an example Default if omitted No filename is saved to the registry email smtphost from to subject p u pw Email smtphost from to subject p u pw Use this option to have Image for Windows email the results of an operation This causes the email to be sent even if log 0 is used However if an operation never starts including a login failure an email is not sent The p u and pw values are optional and relate to the port user and password that should be used Port 25 i
135. ches your entire network if the process of searching takes longer than you d like unselect the Show Entire Network option shown in the settings window in Step 3 Image for Windows User Manual Page 30 of 227 Image for Windows 2 86 crnima Select where you want to save the backup Computer Ca Windows Drives A C Win7 7 54GiB Free B 3 Entire Network 9 CD DVD amp D SONY DVD RW AW Q170A H E HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 H E HD 1 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E Virtual Drives TeraByte Unlimited Caution It s generally not recommended to save your image to the same partition you are backing up If you must do this move the backup image to another location after it has completed By default Image for Windows will create a Single File Set backup This type of backup is comprised of a single image regardless of how many individual partitions you are backing up The first file created for the image set will be named lt name gt TBI where lt name gt is a character string you supply If Image for Windows creates additional files Image for Windows will name them lt name gt 1 lt name gt 2 lt name gt 3 and so on The number of files Image for Windows will create depends on the overall size of the backup and the File Size setting you choose when you set the options for the backup in a later step
136. ckup media in a different physical location than your computer and that you place your backup media in a fire proof safe designed for media By storing your backup media offsite you don t run the risk of losing both your computer and your backups in the event of fire or theft By storing your backups in a fire proof safe designed for media your backups will be protected if a fire occurs at the location where you store your backups Note Be sure to use a fire proof safe designed for media because while paper doesn t burn until 451 degrees Fahrenheit media will melt Computer media may be damaged at temperatures above 125 degrees Fahrenheit and 80 humidity Full Backups A full backup as the name implies involves backing up all specified data How Often Should Back Up We hear this question a lot and there is no right answer Instead there is the answer that works best for you To figure out how often to back up ask yourself How much data am I willing to re enter because once you restore your latest backup you will need to re enter all information since you made that backup Many people do not want to re enter any information so they back up daily Others feel their computer usage is such that they are willing to back up once each week and re enter up to seven days worth of data Decide how much data you are willing to re enter and set your backup schedule accordingly Incremental Backups
137. command line options use whatever global device option is set at the time the parameter is handled Example using the ue global option and a2k device option when restoring imagew ue a2k r d w0 f mybackup The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Options section except as otherwise noted Table 1 Image for Windows Global Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable uvl 0 VolumeLabels 0 Instructs Image for Windows to display the string found in the partition table of the EMBR if possible rather than volume labels Default if omitted Image for Windows will display volume labels even if identifiers for applicable partitions exist in the EMBR seq SeqVollD 1 Instructs Image for Windows to assign ID numbers to volumes in sequential order rather than random order Default if omitted Image for Windows will assign ID numbers to the volumes in random order cb n CheckBoxes n Determines if check boxes are used for partition selection 0 No only a drive or single partition can be selected 1 Use individual checkboxes Each partition has its own selection 2 Use linked checkboxes Each partition has its own selection but they are linked and select
138. counters an error during validation Image for DOS will abort the restore operation without overwriting the target Change GUID When restoring to a GPT drive selecting this option will change the GUID of each partition restored Validate Byte for Byte If you select this option Image for DOS will verify that every byte in the source data was restored correctly ensuring 100 accuracy This option generally doubles the processing time of the overall operation but is advisable to use where maximum reliability is required You can but do not need to select the Validate Before Restore option if you select the Validate Byte for Byte option Wipe Unused Sectors This option will wipe zero out unused sectors in the restored partition s or drive depending on the type of restore performed Image for Windows User Manual Page 83 of 227 When restoring single partitions or when restoring multiple partitions to a drive with existing partitions sectors located outside of the restored partition s are not wiped If a partition is resized during the restore the wiped area for that partition is the final size of the restored partition not the size of the source partition When restoring multiple partitions to a drive with no existing partitions the entire drive is wiped including all gaps between any partitions Using this option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and restore in a single operation such as when deploying images to used
139. d Simple Allow program to control most options Traditional You have control over options lt lt Previous f T Cancel Copyright 2004 2015 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Image for Windows User Manual Page 63 of 227 3 The License Agreement screen appears Read the Image for DOS license agreement and if you accept it select the I accept the agreement button and click Next ke MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 Sx License Agreement Full Use License TeraByte Unlimited a End User License Agreement 7 Revised April 1 2011 PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE UPGRADING COPYING INSTALLING OR USING THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE PROGRAM the Softwarel THIS AGREEMENT SETS FORTH THE STANDARD FULL accept the agreement C do not accept the agreement lt lt Previous Copyright 2004 2012 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved 4 Ifyou are creating the Image for DOS GUI boot media or you ve placed a customized IFD INI file in the directory with the MakeDisk files the Select the optional components screen will be displayed Otherwise the Device and Checkbox Options screen will be shown skip to Step 5 m Select the optional components CD Boot Image Files IFD INI file from local directory Check boxes to enable the options and then click Next CD Boot Image Files Depending on the boot media typ
140. d Size D E F options are faster than their A B C counterparts but offer slightly less compression The Enhanced Speed A B options offer decent compression with the emphasis on back up speed over backup file size Note The Enhanced Size D E F and Enhanced Speed A B options require version 2 72 or later they are not backwards compatible File Size This option appears only when saving images to hard drives Select this option to choose the maximum size of the image files created by Image for Windows The available options are Max Automatically creates the largest file s allowed by the file system in use on the target medium For example the largest files that may reside on FAT FAT32 and NTFS partitions are 2 GiB 4 GiB and just under 16 TiB respectively 7 95 GiB Useful if the image file s will later be burned to standard dual layer DVD disc s Image for Windows User Manual Page 51 of 227 4 37 GiB Useful if the image file s will later be burned to standard single layer DVD disc s 4 GiB Useful for FAT32 compatibility 2 GiB Useful for FAT compatibility 698 MiB Useful if the image file s will later be burned to 700 MiB CD disc s 648 MiB Useful if the image file s will later be burned to 650 MiB CD disc s You can also type in the desired value in bytes Kibibytes KiB Mebibytes MiB or Gibibytes GiB Decimal values are supported e g 2 5GiB Description You
141. d drive or partitions to backup Computer HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 M System Reserved 100 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 active M C Win7 38810 MiB HPFS NTFS 02 lj Recovery 2047 MiB HPFS NTFS 03 HD 4 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 jj E Data 40957 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 E HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E 2 Virtual Drives TeraByte Unlimited Add Virtual Drive Information Compact lt lt Previous Cancel Selecting a Drive or a Partition To back up an entire drive check the box beside the Drive icon HDO HD1 etc Remember you can back up only one drive at a time If you want to back up a partition check the box beside that partition When restoring an image of a partition you might need to use the Update BOOT INI Set Active and Write Standard MBR Code or Restore First Track options described in the section Image for Windows Restore Options If you individually select all partitions on a drive Image for Windows handles the backup as individual partition backups not as a full drive backup You can restore an entire drive in one restore operation using individual partitions but you can t set sizing or rescaling options or restore to a different location sector LBA Image for Windows provides a visual clue as you make your backup selections If you select a partition a check appears in the Drive box but the box turns
142. d of the L LBA LBA offset from the EBR of the volume Default if omitted The volume s L LBA will be used in the volume s BPB Image for Windows User Manual Page 146 of 227 usnrf 0 USNRollBackFix 0 Disables any attempt at notifying Windows Active Directory that the system has been restored Default if omitted Attempts to notify Windows Active Directory that the system has been restored You also can set options to control the behavior of PHYLock these options are described in Table 2 In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the PHYLock_Options section and if necessary disable the PHYLockUseReg option in the Options section Table 2 PHYLock Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable pldis PHYLockDisable 1 Use this option to disable PHYLock completely Default if omitted Image for Windows uses PHYLock to lock the disk or partition plifnl PHYLocklIfNoLock 1 Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to use PHYLock if Image for Windows can t obtain a normal lock Default if omitted Image for Windows will report that it cannot perform the selected operation because it cannot obtain a lock on the selected drive or partition plrell PHYLockReleaseLock 1 Use this option to instruct Image for Windows
143. d select the component on the Additional Components window If you also select the Create Image for DOS Recovery Disk option on the Select Additional Tasks window skip Step 1 below Image for Windows User Manual Page 61 of 227 1 Choose Start All Programs Terabyte Unlimited Image for Windows V2 Image for DOS Create Recovery Boot Disk This will trigger a UAC prompt in Windows Vista and Windows 7 if UAC is enabled Select to allow the program to run The MakeDisk welcome screen appears g MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 Welcome to Image for DOS bootable media setup This wizard will guide you through the steps required to create bootable media for Image for DOS Click Next to begin Previous a E Cancel Copyright 2094 2012 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Image for Windows User Manual Page 62 of 227 2 Click Next on the MakeDisk welcome screen The Select the product to build screen appears Image for DOS can operate in simple or traditional mode Select the operating mode you wish to use the mode can be changed at any time in program settings and click Next Selecting Simple will enable Simple Operations mode This allows Image for DOS to automatically handle most options for you Backup Restore Validate and Copy operations are available in this mode Refer to Using Simple Operations Mode on page 114 for details g MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 Sa m Select the product to buil
144. date all partition w entries in the boot ini file found in the target location to point to itself This can be useful when copying Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows 2003 operating systems to a new drive or location Write Changed Sectors Only Enable this option when copying to write only the changed sectors to the target drive target will be read to compare Useful in cases where a large portion of the data is the same and it s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive e g copying partition to SSD drive This option is unavailable if not supported by the drive Update Boot Partition This option updates any references to the copied partition in the active boot partition on the target drive This is useful for situations where the boot partition differs from the system partition However you typically wouldn t want to use this option if you re creating a copy of an existing partition you want to keep unless the target drive will be independent of the original drive For this to be useful the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or part of the same copy operation Note This option is not displayed when copying a full drive if the Automatic Boot Partition Update global option is enabled the default Image for Windows User Manual Page 110 of 227 Write Standard MBR Code If you select this option Image for Windows will install standard master boot code to the Master Boot Record MBR after c
145. drive with existing partitions sectors located outside of the restored partition s are not wiped If a partition is resized during the restore the wiped area for that partition is the final size of the restored partition not the size of the source partition When restoring a full drive or when restoring multiple partitions to a drive with no existing partitions the entire drive is wiped including all gaps between any partitions Using this option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and restore ina single operation such as when deploying images to used systems Move to Original MBR Entry If you select this option Image for Windows will move the partition table entry of the restored partition to the same location in the master partition table as it had on the source drive Image for Windows will also move the existing partition table entry to another location rather than overwrite it You may want to enable this option if you use an environment that tracks master partition table entries such as Linux GPT Hidden From OS Use this option when restoring to a GPT drive to indicate that the operating system being restored will not see the destination drive as GPT when booted For example an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the OxEE placeholder partition is missing from the MBR Using this option prevents Image for Windows from using GPT specific fix up information on the drive after the restore Assume Original HD If you select
146. e A term used in Microsoft operating systems to describe the specific drive letters that point to volumes In practical terms it is the same thing as a drive letter Source Image for Windows User Manual Page 218 of 227 When backing up source refers to the hard drive that you want to back up When restoring source refers to the location on a storage medium that contains a backup you want to restore Target When backing up target refers to the location on a storage medium usually CD DVD discs a hard drive partition or an external hard drive where you want to store a backup When restoring target refers to the location on a hard drive where you want to restore a backup you previously created A restore target can either be an area of free space or a partition In the latter case the partition and any information it contains will be deleted immediately prior to the restore Image for Windows User Manual Page 219 of 227 What is Shareware Shareware distribution provides users with the opportunity to try software before buying it If you try a Shareware program and continue using it you are expected to register it Individual programs differ on details some request registration others require it and some specify a maximum trial period When you register the software you may receive anything from the right to continue using the software to an updated program with printed manual Shareware is a dist
147. e Automatic Restore Normal Validate Copy Image for Windows User Manual Page 27 of 227 3 You can click the Settings button to display settings you can establish for the Image for Windows program In the section Understanding Options immediately following these steps you ll find details on the purpose of each setting Click OK to redisplay the Image for Windows Welcome window shown previously Image for Windows Settings General Geometry PHYLock VSS Scheduled Tasks Password r Simple Operations Partition Selection CD Boot Image V Use New Windows MBR p No Check Boxes Image for DOS Retain Failed Backups Individual Check Boxes Image for Linux z r Check sanen Linked Check Boxes Custom CDBOOT INS V Automatic Boot Partition Update 2 2 V Automatic Restore Drive Search Log fle ee V Use Volume Label Output Disk ID to Command Line Port V Automatic PHYLock RAM Mode Select 7 Sequential Volume IDs Disable Cancel Completion Alarm V Resize with Caching Prefer Target Disk ID on Change Disable Power Changes Disable Priority Changes 7 No Service Control V Show Entire Network V Bold Views Image for Windows User Manual Page 28 of 227 4 Click Next In the window that appears select the hard drive or partition you want to back up Image for Windows 2 86 SE Select the har
148. e 1 Use this parameter to make the partition you restore active Default if omitted Image for Windows does not make the restored partition active unless no other partitions are active and the restored partition is HDO t WriteMBR 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows install standard MBR code after completing the restore operation Standard MBR code is the code that boots the active partition Default if omitted Image for Windows does not write standard MBR code unless the MBR is empty e UseSameMBREntry 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows move the partition table entry of the restored partition to the same location in the master partition table as it appeared on the source drive Image for Windows will move the existing partition table entry to another location rather than overwriting it Default if omitted Image for Windows does not move the partition table of the restored partition ms n i N A Use this parameter to have Image for Windows move the partition table entry of the restored partition to a given slot in the MBR The value n is 0 to 3 This option is only applicable when restoring a single partition Default if omitted Image for Windows does not move the partition table of the restored partition embrid n N A This parameter is used to set a specific ID value to the restored partition if an EMBR exists The ID is only used if not already in use by another partition T
149. e EMBR will be copied If you aren t sure type AUTO in this box Resize After Copy Currently available only for FAT FAT32 NTFS and EXT 2 3 4 partitions you can use this text box to specify a new size for the copied partition bound by the Minimum and Maximum values specified by Image for Windows The units used here are mebibytes abbreviated MiB Please refer to the section titled Data Storage Size Unit Conventions at the beginning of this manual for more information New Name Enter the new volume name label for the copied partition If left blank the name will not be changed from its copied value Save Defaults Click this button to save the settings you establish In the future Image for Windows will display these settings automatically Show Command Click this button to display the information you would type at a command prompt to start a copy with the options you selected as you displayed the various windows in Image for Windows You can use this information to create a batch file or TBScript TBS file that runs Image for Windows by selecting the Save to File option The command line can be edited before being saved For details on using Image for Windows from a command prompt see the section Running Image for Windows from the Command Line on Page 124 Using Simple Operations Mode Simple Operations mode allows Image for Windows to automatically handle most options for you Backup Restore Validate and
150. e Unlimited reserves the right to refuse any communication method that would incur a cost Ombudsman Statement This program is produced by a member of the Association of Software Professionals ASP ASP wants to make sure that the shareware principle works for you If you are unable to resolve a shareware related problem with an ASP member by contacting the member directly ASP may be able to help The ASP Ombudsman can help you resolve a dispute or problem with an ASP member but does not provide technical support for members products Please contact the ASP Ombudsman online at www asp software org omb Image for Windows User Manual Page 2 of 227 Table of Contents TABLE OF CONTENTS 20 000 ccccccceccceccecceeececcececeecececeeceecaeeceeceeaeeceeceeceeeteeaueseeens 3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 2 ccccecceeccecceccceececceeececcecauececeaeeceeceecaeeceeceeeaeeeeeens 6 DATA STORAGE SIZE UNIT CONVENTIONS cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 7 HOW IMAGE FOR WINDOWS WORKS eccccceceeeececceeececceceeeececcuceceeceeeaeeceeeaes 7 WAYS TO USE IMAGE FOR WINDOWS 0 cc cece ceecceececececeeeeeeseeeeseeeeueeeneeeeas 8 IMAGE FOR WINDOWS QUICK START cccccccecceeceecceccecececcecceeeceeceeeaeeceeeaes 9 QUICKSTART CREATING A RECOVERY BOOT DISC ccceccccseeeceeceeeeeceseueeeeeesaeeeeeeseaees 10 Boot Media and UEFI Systems cccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeee 10 QUIC
151. e access Default if omitted Image for Windows will not delete the existing target partition before restoring or copying to it csigut ChangeSigUseTarget 1 Use this option to retain the existing signature of the target disk when restoring or copying a drive and csig is used For example this is useful when scheduling a drive copy where csig is used and you need to specify the target disk by its signature drive number not used since it could change Default if omitted When csig is used the target disk signature will not be retained stdout filename N A Use this option to redirect program output that would normally be displayed in the console to the specified file For example imagew 1 d 0 stdout output txt The output from the 1 operation will be saved to the file output txt Default if omitted Program output is displayed normally in the console msvr server MServer server This option enables a simple network interface allowing Image for Windows to communicate via TCP IP with the specified server and report its current progress and completion The server can be the server name an IP address or localhost depending on the location The port can be specified using the mport option Otherwise the default port 54313 will be used All communication is plain text with each line terminated by CR LF If problems are encountered the communications will be shut down and attempts to reconnect will be made approximate
152. e being created e g floppy disk you may need to exclude the CD Boot Image files to save space These files are needed to make any direct burned discs bootable e g when you save a backup image directly to a DVD IFD INI file from the local directory The IFD INI file was found in the MakeDisk directory If you select this option it will be included in the build This allows you to use an already customized version of the file you will not be prompted for IFD options settings If using Image for DOS CUI skip to Step 5 The following options apply only to Image for DOS GUI Image for Windows User Manual Page 64 of 227 The Mouse Support screen is displayed Select to enable or disable mouse support and then click Next Note that the BIOS must support the mouse This may require enabling the USB Legacy Support in the BIOS Mouse Support Enabled C Disabled The Video Method screen is displayed Select the desired video method and then click Next Video Method VESA Video Chipset Video VESA Video Uses the VESA Video standard for the display instead of a specific chipset implementation Support is provided by the video card s BIOS This is the recommended video method Will fall back to Chipset Video if VESA is not supported Chipset Video Attempts to access the video chipset directly for supported chipsets It is not recommended to select this option unless you know for certain it is r
153. e option since it also applies using VSS The tracking is at a disk level so it only makes sense to use this on entire drive backups or where you only back up the same partitions continually and where the backups occur without a reboot Since PHYLock is close to the drive on the driver stack it is able to track writes that may bypass the filesystem however it cannot track writes that occur from any driver closer to the drive than itself as rare as that may be In addition it can only track writes that have been sent to the drive and would not detect changes that are cached Therefore it s not recommended to use this option but it is here for those that want the option of fast incremental backups As always don t let your incremental chain get too long or you ll eventually run out of file handles or memory including those limits that may apply to the restore environment The VSS Settings group of options allow enabling VSS and configuring other VSS specific settings Use VSS When Available This option will cause Image for Windows to try using Microsoft s Volume Shadow Copy Services before using PHYLock on Windows 2003 or later If VSS is unable to be started then PHYLock may be used Exclude Files To Not Backup If you have configured the VSS FilesNotToBackup registry key you can enable this option to have Image for Windows exclude those files folders when creating a backup image or copying a partition This option applies only when V
154. e partitions that have been copied to the target location If you do not select this option and the target drive number differs from that of the source drive applicable drive references residing within the restored partitions will be updated to reflect the new hard drive number This option is useful when copying Linux partitions Ignore IO Errors Under ordinary circumstances if Image for Windows encounters a bad sector on the target drive while copying Image for Windows will notify you concerning the write error and give you the option to continue or abort If you select the Ignore IO Errors option Image for Windows will ignore the error and continue Generally you should select this option only if you need to copy to a target drive that contains known bad sectors On some systems if you select this setting and Image for Windows encounters bad sectors there will be a significant delay as the internal retry recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector s Log Results to File Select this option to make Image for Windows log the details of the copy operation By default Image for Windows saves the log as IFW LOG in the IMAGEW EXE program folder You can use program settings or the logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFw LoG Note that Image for Windows must be able to write to the specified folder to save the log x Change Volume SN Select this option to change
155. e program could be doing nothing if the IO completes before this delay expires The only time you may want to extend it is if you expect multiple IO requests to occur that you want the application to wait for to prevent potential thrashing This option is relevant only if IO throttling is enabled Throttle on Reads Writes Default 0 Max 20 IO Throttle Abort ms The abort value is the maximum amount of time to wait for other IO to complete before continuing even if more IO is pending This value will be adjusted to be a multiple rounded up of the Delay value above If set to zero then throttling is disabled This option is relevant only if IO throttling is enabled Throttle on Reads Writes Default 80 Max 500 10 Throttle Interval ms This controls how often the throttle may engage Lower values throttle more often for better response time of other applications but at the cost of slowing down the backup Larger values throttle less often for a faster backup but at the cost of potentially slowing down other applications Setting this value to zero disables IO Throttling This option is relevant only if IO throttling is enabled Throttle on Reads Writes Default 100 Image for Windows User Manual Page 44 of 227 Track Writes Enables PHYLock to track writes so that incremental backups complete quickly without having to read and check all data for changes This option is part of PHYLock but not affected by the Disable Usag
156. e system e TBWinRE the Image for Windows boot media supports booting via CD or USB flash drive on UEFI systems Secure Boot is supported and the BIOS can be in either UEFI mode or Legacy mode TBWinRE is automatically installed with Image for Windows on Windows 7 8 or later You must run TBWinPE RE Builder or the TBWinRE script to create your boot media e Image for Linux IFL v2 81 or later supports booting via CD or USB flash drive on UEFI systems Secure Boot is supported e Image for DOS IFD will not boot on UEFI systems configured in UEFI mode To boot on these systems Secure Boot must be disabled and you must enable or use Legacy mode Creating the Image for DOS Boot Media Note If you prefer you can create TBWinPE or TBWinRE boot media tutorials for creating TBWinPE and TBWinRE can be found on TeraByte s website You can also create BartPE or Image for Linux recovery media To create a BartPE recovery disc see the section Using Image for Windows in BartPE on Page 86 To create Image for Windows User Manual Page 10 of 227 an Image for Linux recovery disk see the Image for Linux manual If your keyboard connects to your computer via a USB port you might prefer to create and use an Image for Linux or a BartPE recovery media because both of those products support USB keyboards that DOS might not support The steps below assume that you have installed MakeDisk but that you opted not to create the I
157. e your backup Tutorials for creating a BartPE CD can be found on TeraByte s website Note The version of Image for Windows installed in the BartPE and other WinPE based media is a fully functional product and you can use it to both back up and restore Using Image for Windows in BartPE The Image for Windows plugin for Bart s PE Builder enables you to run Image for Windows in Bart s Preinstallation Environment commonly referred to as BartPE Essentially BartPE provides you with a core Windows environment separate from your main Windows installation allowing you to perform maintenance tasks you would not be able to perform from within the primary Windows environment itself For example running Image for Windows from BartPE will allow you to restore your Windows partition something you cannot do while your Windows partition is in use For more information on BartPE please visit its home page Note BartPE is a third party product and is not included with Image for Windows A plug in to install Image for Windows in BartPE is included with Image for Windows but to obtain BartPE or to learn more about BartPE please visit the BartPE home page http www nu2 nu pebuilder You ll also find a tutorial that guides you through creating a BartPE boot disc that contains Image for Windows at http www terabyteunlimited com howto index htm Before running Image for Windows in BartPE you must first create the I
158. ect for prompts that may occur in other command line options This option is disabled when additional media is needed file not found and um is not specified Default if omitted Image for Windows does not run an unattended backup ui N A Use this parameter when performing an unattended backup to tell Image for Windows to assume the answer to all Abort Retry Ignore prompts is Ignore You can use this parameter alone or in conjunction with un Using ui with uy is unnecessary since uy alone causes Ignore to be selected Default if omitted Image for Windows assumes the answer to all Abort Retry Ignore prompts is either Abort or Ignore depending on whether you set un or uy respectively If un uy and ui are all omitted Image for Windows displays the Abort Retry Ignore prompt um N A During an unattended backup using CD DVD discs use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to ignore the first request for media This option helps you start the backup if Image for Windows User Manual Page 139 of 227 you have already inserted a disc and a prompt appears asking for the disc This option works only for the first prompt you need to respond to other prompts for media unless you specify uy or un If you combine uy or un with this option then any additional disc requests will cause the program to end with an error instead of prompting for the media For media other than CD DVD discs or during a restore validati
159. ed upon restoring with version 2 62 or later This is not an option for normal use Default if omitted No restrictions are set evlogl n EventLogLevel n This option affects how Image for Windows writes to the Windows event log during backup restore validation and copy operations Use one of the following values in place of n 0 Disable all event logging 1 Log errors only 2 Log errors and warnings Image for Windows User Manual Page 129 of 227 3 Log errors warnings and start stop status 4 Log errors warnings start stop status and information The Windows Event Viewer can be used to access the Image for Windows event log entries located in Windows Logs Application The following events and categories are logged Event ID 257 Information 258 Warning 259 Error Task Category None 0 Backup 1 Restore 2 Validate 3 Licensing 4 Copy 5 Default if omitted Image for Windows will log errors warnings and start stop status to the event log equivalent to evlogl 3 relax n RelaxedMatching n Use this option when performing a differential or incremental backup to instruct Image for Windows to relax some of the criteria it uses to determine the drive you used as the source during the corresponding full backup This option has no effect during full backup operations Use one of the following values in place of n 1 Enable relaxed criteria Disk signature must mat
160. ed values of the drive Image for Windows User Manual Page 176 of 227 s n s n Place under the HDx section Use this parameter in conjunction with c and h to manually specify the cylinder head and sector values for the target drive when you restore a backup image This parameter specifies the last sector and n is a number you supply Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the BIOS reported values of the drive gc GeoCalc n Place under the HDx section Determine how a devices geometry is obtained or calculated 0 Default 1 LBA 2 Large 3 Normal 4 Bit Shift 5 Device Bit Shift Default if omitted Default method is used rsin N A Use this parameter to resize a partition after restoring nis the size in MiB s that you want to establish for the restored partition If you try to use this parameter in conjunction with x the Expand option x overrides rs Default if omitted Image for Windows restores the partition without resizing exlist n ExcludeList n This option will override the method used when excluded files folders are restored the backup image being restored must have been created with an exclusion list The following values for n are supported 0 Excluded files are restored with their actual sizes but contain whatever data is already on the drive files are not wiped or zero filled 1 Excluded files are deleted Folders will not be deleted 2 Excluded f
161. eed up Changes Only Backup Backwards Compatible Max v Windows 7x64 Pro Drive Save Defauts Show Command Schedule Backup lt lt Previous Next gt gt Image for Windows User Manual Page 205 of 227 3 Inthe Image for Windows Task 1 window that appears the command line in the Run box reflects the source destination and backup options that you selected The command line also includes the uy and um parameters that allow Image for Windows to run an unattended backup These parameters along with related parameters un and ui are described in Table 1 Image for Windows Global Parameters Be sure to enter the automation options you want to have in place i e uy um un um or un ui Note If you would like the backup to be password protected or encrypted when the scheduled task runs you must append pw my password to the command line in the task window where my password is the password you wish to use If the enc parameter is present without a valid pw parameter also present the backup task will not run successfully Image for Windows Task 1 ea Task Schedule Settings A a C Windows Tasks Image for Windows Task 1 job D Run aw exe b uy um d w0 0x1 4 E MyBackup v vt Eiee TERABYTE User Run only if logged on W Enabled scheduled task runs at specified time ok Cance
162. el before it interrupts the current operation While the backup is in process you can change the power options and Image for Windows User Manual Page 34 of 227 process priority options using the drop down boxes The default power option is Auto which will prompt to reboot when finished if a reboot is necessary If the selected power option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown Select Exit Only to have Image for Windows exit when finished The selected process priority will remain in effect until the program ends or is changed manually When Image for Windows finishes a window appears to inform you that Image for Windows created the backup successfully You can click Close 100 Image for Windows 2 86 Lo ace Operation The backup has completed successfully ltem Progress TeraByte E Unlimited Overall Progress Statistics MiB Remaining 0 Time Elapsed 0 00 00 05 MiB Processed 26 Time Remaining Power Options Process Priority Auto Normal A Help Previous Menu gt gt Note If Image for Windows reports that it cannot obtain a lock and directs you to consider using PHYLock and PHYLock is already installed read this article and follow the instructions in it http www terabyteunlimited com kb article php 7id 338 If PHYLock is not installed or not available and VSS is not being used e g you re using Image for Wind
163. equired e g VESA doesn t work or you re instructed to use it by TeraByte support Will fall back to VESA Video if chipset detected is not supported Note While each video method should fall back to the other one if it fails this may not always happen In this case try the other video method The Video Mode screen will be displayed Select the desired video mode and then click Next For the best viewing experience it is recommended to select 800x600 or higher with 64K colors Video Mode C 640x480 64K Colors 800x600 64K Colors 1024768 64K Colors 640x480 256 Colors C 800x600 256 Colors C 1024x768 256 Colors Standard YGA 16 Colors Image for Windows User Manual Page 65 of 227 5 If you selected Simple in Step 2 skip to Step 9 Otherwise the Device and Checkbox Options screen is displayed k MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 Sa m Device and Checkbox Options optional ATAPI DMA PATA Disable SATA Disable SATA Bias USB 1 1 UHCI l Corect USB Hang 1 Corect USB Hang 2 Disable Checkbox Selection lt lt Previous Cancel Copyright 2004 2012 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Enable the desired options on the Device and Checkbox Options screen ATAPI DMA PATA If your PATA CD DVD drive supports ATAPI DMA enabling this option dramatically speeds up the process of reading from and writing to the CD DVD drive
164. equired for the source drive on systems with TRIM enabled by disabling TRIM during the backup operation When TRIM is enabled the original contents of deleted sectors must be cached whereas a normal delete doesn t overwrite the sectors and instead just updates the directory entry Note If the operation doesn t complete due to reboot shutdown process forced to end etc TRIM will stay disabled until enabled using the Windows fsutil program fsutil behavior set DisableDeleteNotify 0 If IFW completes the operation even with errors reported TRIM will be properly reset to the enabled state Default if omitted Image for Windows does not disable TRIM during a backup operation hash CreateHash 1 Use this option to have Image for Windows create a hash file to speed up creating a Changes Only differential or incremental backup This option is only available when creating an image that is not being saved to disc media CD DVD BD By default this option is also ignored if the bc BackwardsCompatible option is enabled The hash file will be limited to the max file size and have the same file name as the backup with an extension starting at 40 followed by 1 2 etc as needed The actual speed increase realized when creating an image will vary depending on the system If the hash file is deleted the backup will proceed as normal without it This option can also be used to create a hash file for an existing image For example hash
165. er using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of Image for Windows User Manual Page 195 of 227 quotes o can be use with a u f ands base N A This parameter specifies the starting image file to combine All image files in the chain from this file back to the original base file will be combined base x bkup x is source drive letter base x mypath bkup mypath or my path is path to bkup base x my path bkup bkup is name of existing backup omit file Or extension r Or base d p bkup oase d p mypath bkup ree device partition path and base d p my path bkup PASEM BnyPalnnup p is source partition ID hex or decimal base GUID p mypath bkup notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the base and before the source hard drive number dis source hard drive number w Windows Device o Optical drive v Virtual drive Whether using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of quotes del n N A Use this option to remove the combined files After the combine process has finished the original image files will be deleted Deleting the files will render any remaining incrementals i
166. erent user or similar depending on your version of Windows To add a password enter the name and password twice for verification into the fields and then click Add To delete a password select it in the list and press the Del key on the keyboard Image for Windows User Manual Page 47 of 227 Setting Backup Options You can set the same options when backing up in Image for Windows whether you are backing up a partition or an entire drive The options shown below are for a Full backup 4 Image for Windows 2 86 nSoma Backup Options V Validate Validate Bytefor Byte Encrypt Data Standard m V Omit Page File Data V Omit Hibemation Data Ignore IO Errors Password Disable Media Ejection V Log Results to File Reboot when Completed i Shutdown when Completed File Size Suspend when Completed TeraByte Backup Unused Sectors Unlimited Disable TRIM Speed up Changes Only Backup Backwards Compatible Max v Description Save Defauits Show Command Schedule Backup Validate If you select this option Image for Windows will perform internal consistency checks on the backup file s after creating them Enabling this option increases the overall processing time but can help ensure that the backup is reliable Validate Byte for Byte If you select this option Image for Windows will verify that every byte in the source data was backed
167. es f server port sessionname password Used to connect to a multicasting server Use quotes if any of the values contain a Pxamples space Default values will be used for f 192 168 0 16 port sessionname and password if not t OfficeServer Win8 Clean pswd SPecified server Specify the system running the multicasting server port Specify the port to use The default is port 54312 sessionname Specify the session name No session name is used if omitted password Specify the password for the session Omit if no password is required In Table 8 you find the command line parameters that you might want to use with Image for Windows when validating an image The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Validate_Defaults section unless as noted otherwise Table 8 Image for Windows Optional Validation Parameters noej NoEject 1 Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows never to automatically open the optical drive tray Default if omitted Image for Windows will automatically open the optical drive tray whenever a new disc is needed and at the completion of the validate operation cdrs n CDReadSpeed n Use this setting to specify the maxi
168. ether with all of your copies of the Evaluation Software in any form This Agreement will also automatically terminate without notice if you fail to comply fully with any term or condition of this Agreement or if your normal business operations are disrupted or discontinued for more than thirty days by reason of insolvency bankruptcy receivership or business termination Upon termination of this Agreement you must destroy all copies of the Evaluation Software in any form 3 OWNERSHIP AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION TeraByte or its licensors own the Evaluation Software under copyright trade secret and all other laws that may apply All product names designs and logos associated with the Evaluation Software are trademarks of TeraByte The source code of the Evaluation Software and all information regarding the design structure or internal operation of the Evaluation Software are valuable trade secrets of TeraByte or third parties with which TeraByte has licensing arrangements Confidential Information provided however that Confidential Information shall not include information which otherwise would be Confidential Information to the extent that such information was publicly known or otherwise known to you previously to the time of disclosure which subsequently became known through no act or omission by you or which otherwise became known to you other than through disclosure by TeraByte You shall not sell transfer publish disclose display o
169. etting as specified when the base image was created Default if omitted Image for Windows backs up only used sectors backed up for recognized file systems and uses raw mode automatically for unrecognized file systems skp 0 SkipPageFile 0 Set this parameter to instruct Image for Windows to include the page files pagefile sys swapfile sys in the backup Image for Windows User Manual Page 157 of 227 Default if omitted Image for Windows skips page files skh 0 SkipHiberFile 0 Set this parameter to instruct Image for Windows to include the hibernation file hiberfil sys in the backup Default if omitted Image for Windows skips the hibernation file N PostValidate 1 Set this parameter to instruct Image for Windows to perform a standard validation of the image file s as part of the backup operation Default if omitted Image for Windows does not validate the backup image after creating it vb PostValidate 2 Set this parameter to instruct Image for Windows to perform a byte for byte validation of the image file s as part of the backup operation This also performs a standard validation Default if omitted Image for Windows does not validate the backup image after creating it vpd ValidateDisk 1 You can use this option when saving images to a CD or DVD drive This option ensures that the discs containing image files are readable and verifies that the data on the discs appears to
170. f existing partitions will be replaced by the restore a warning will appear showing the drive and partitions affected Click Yes to continue if everything looks correct 4 The summary screen is shown Click Start to run the restore Validating a Backup 1 Select Validate a previous backup to check its integrity on the main window and click Next 2 Select the backup you wish to validate and then click Next While on this screen you can select to view or mount a backup using TBIView or TBlIMount If using a mouse right click the backup and then select the desired action from the pop up menu If using the keyboard select the desired backup and then press F5 to open with TBIView or F9 to open with TBIMount Select the backup file to validate Backup Completion Date Time A Backups from this computer Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT126M4SSD2 10 30 2015 4 22 PM Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT128M4SSD2 4 28 2015 11 42 PM Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT126M4SSD2 4 28 2015 11 03 PM 3 The summary screen is shown Click Start to run the validation Copy a Hard Drive 1 Select Copy a hard drive to another hard drive on the main window and click Next Image for Windows User Manual Page 117 of 227 2 Select the hard drive to copy and then click Next Select the hard drive to copy 4 Computer Simple Operations Enabled Drive 0 119 24 GiB C M4 CT128M4SSD2 Drive 1 2 73 TiB E F ST3000DM001 9YN166 Drive
171. f you will be restoring outside of Windows as most home users will or you are running Windows 98 Me your computer s BIOS must provide access to the hard drive In addition it must meet the following minimum system requirements of Image for DOS IBM compatible personal computer Pentium or newer 32 MB RAM Warning to Windows 8 x and Windows 10 Users You must disable the Windows Fast startup option or you risk corruption of your partitions and data when the partitions are used outside of Windows e g you boot into Image for Linux after shutdown and save an image to a data drive To disable using Windows Open the Control Panel and select Power Options Click the Choose what the Power buttons do from the links on the left Click the Change settings that are currently unavailable link and then remove the checkmark from the Turn on fast startup recommended option under Shutdown settings To disable using Boolt BM Boot into Bootlt BM click Partition Work on the desktop then select the Windows 8 x 10 partition and click Properties Click the Disable Fast Start button Image for Windows User Manual Page 6 of 227 Data Storage Size Unit Conventions Since Image for Windows and this document refer to data storage size units this section provides clarification on the definitions we use Storage device manufacturers typically define gigabytes GB in base decimal where 1 GB 1 000 MB 10 bytes 1 000 000 000 b
172. ge for Windows use PHYLock if Image for Windows cannot obtain a normal lock on the partition you are trying to back up Use and Release Lock Check this box to have Image for Windows attempt a normal lock and then use PHYLock even if Image for Windows obtained the lock If Image for Windows obtained a normal lock Image for Windows releases the lock after enabling PHYLock Volume Flush Check this box to have Image for Windows attempt to force Windows to clear the volume s cache buffers You can t hurt anything if you check this box Use Disk Storage Check this box to have PHYLock use hard disk storage in addition to memory up to the limit specified in the Disk Cache Size setting Note that even if you check this box PHYLock may sometimes run in RAM mode It s recommended that you leave this option checked Due to fast compression and the design of low level storage drivers you may experience slow response times using applications during backup operations This slowness is actually caused by IO being delayed on slower traditional spinning hard drives and not CPU utilization 1O throttling was introduced to alleviate this condition at the cost of potentially slowing down the backup operation IO throttling is currently only used when PHYLock is active Note The default timer in Windows has a resolution of 10ms This means option values like 5ms 12ms etc really mean something more like 10ms or 20ms Throttle on Reads C
173. gram priority n Priority n Use this option to have Image for Windows adjust its CPU priority when an operation begins The available options for n are O Low 1 Below Normal 2 Normal 3 Above Normal 4 High Image for Windows User Manual Page 132 of 227 In addition you can enable background mode by adding 8 to the previous values for example 10 Normal CPU run in background mode However running in background mode is VERY slow For example something that normally takes 30 seconds may take 10 minutes when Image for Windows is running in background mode If background mode is enabled you will not be able to change the priority during an Image for Windows operation Default if omitted Image for Windows does not change the priority dpc DisablePriorityChanges 1 Use this option to lock the CPU priority of Image for Windows so it can t be adjusted while the operation is in progress Default if omitted Image for Windows allows priority changes iop n 1OPriority n Use this option to have Image for Windows adjust the priority of the image file itself The available options for n are 0O Very Low idle 1 Low 2 Normal Lowering the priority may allow the system to respond more quickly when running operations on a live system However it may also cause the Image for Windows operation to slow down substantially Default if omitted Image for Windows uses Normal priority for the image file
174. gray If you select all partitions ona drive the Drive box still remains gray and Image for Windows backs up partitions separately instead of storing the entire backup for the drive in one backup file Image for Windows User Manual Page 29 of 227 When a partition is highlighted the following options are available Information Click the Information button to view the details of the partition used space free space size needed to restore etc Note You can also right click on a drive or partition and select Details to view the information Compact Click the Compact button to compact the partition s file system FAT FAT382 and NTFS file systems are supported This option allows you to reduce the size required for a restore You will be prompted to confirm the compaction and then asked for the compaction value size in MiB For example if you have a 250GB partition that contains 50GB of data and requires 150GB of space to restore and you need to restore it to a 100GB partition you can compact the file system to under 100GB before imaging it and then restore it to the 100GB partition 5 Click Next Image for Windows searches for available locations to which you can save a backup file In the window that appears select the location where you want to save the backup file You can save a backup file to CD DVD BD media an external hard drive network share a virtual drive etc Note By default Image for Windows sear
175. hard drive Any unused space on the UFD is available to be used normally If the UFD is 4GB or smaller it s formatted as FAT Otherwise it s formatted as FAT32 Partition MBR FAT FAT32 Partition Int13h Extensions This is the same as the Partition MBR FAT FAT32 Partition mode except that the INT 13 Extension is used this is required for some computers to boot a UFD The Geometry Calculation Method options control how the drive geometry is calculated for the USB SD device It is recommended to try Image for Windows User Manual Page 72 of 227 the Default option first If the device fails to boot properly e g black screen boot failure device not found etc the other options can be tried Make note of which option works properly for future use Note More information on using UFD boot media can be found in this TeraByte KB article 11 Click Finish and respond to subsequent prompts as necessary MakeDisk will then create the boot media or ISO image When MakeDisk finishes the Success screen appears as shown below Gk MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 Sex SUCCESS The Process Completed Successfully If you created bootable media then it s now ready for use If you created an 150 file then you ll need to burn it to a disc using your CD DVD authoring software Visit www terabyteunlimited com for the latest help and information Completed Copyright 2004 2011 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved
176. he command line you must place it before the d option It stays in effect until you disable it using npt 0 You may want to disable this option if you use additional options to select a device partition such as the f 0 0x1 filename option Note that the ini file value is not used on command line based operations Default if omitted Image for Windows treats the selected drive as a drive that uses a partition table anpt AssumeNoPartTable 0x40000 Image for Windows User Manual Page 136 of 227 Place under the HDx section Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to treat the selected drive as a drive that doesn t use a partition table only if the first sector on the drive is all zeros If you use this option on the command line you must place it before the device is specified Note that the ini file value is not used on command line based operations Default if omitted Image for Windows treats the selected drive as a drive that uses a partition table nptrm NPTOptRemMedOnly 0x80000 Goes under the HDx section Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to apply the npt or anpt options on removable media only If you use this option on the command line you must place it before the device is specified Note that the ini file value is not used on command line based operations Default if omitted Image for Windows applies the npt or anpt option to all drives geodis GlobalGeoDisable 1 Use thi
177. he exclusion file should be in the following format options path gt Valid options are Exclude files only Do not delete folders If not specified folders will be deleted t Truncate files instead of deleting them Folders will not be deleted Files are restored with a size of zero bytes k Keep the base folder instead of deleting it when recursion is used and the entire contents are excluded The path can be complete to exclude a specific folder e g Games or you can use wildcards to specify matching files When excluding a folder use a trailing backslash to indicate a folder is specified otherwise a search will be made for matching files Do not surround the path with quotes even if it includes spaces Do not specify a drive letter To also exclude files from subdirectories apply recursion include the gt greater than character after the path Examples t jpg exclude all jpg files in the root folder files will be truncated iso exclude all iso files in the root folder Backups tbi exclude all tbi files in the Backups folder k Games gt exclude the Games folder and all sub folders keep the Games folder use trailing backslash to indicate folder Work Archive exclude the Work Archive folder sub folders not excluded use trailing backslash to indicate folder jpg gt exclude all jpg files in the root folder and all sub folders Movies mpg
178. he following values in place of n 0 Default legacy mode Settings saved in the registry are separate for the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of the program 32 Settings will be migrated from the 64 bit section of the registry to the 32 bit section Both versions of the program will access them from the 32 bit section Requires Image for Windows 2 94 or later 64 Settings will be migrated from the 32 bit section of the registry to the 64 bit section Both versions of the program will access them from the 64 bit section Requires Image for Windows 2 94 or later When settings are migrated any existing settings in the destination section that match those being moved will be overwritten Typically this option is only used one time when Image for Windows is already installed and you want both the 32 bit and 64 bit versions of the program to use the same settings For example you have passwords saved for the 32 bit version of Image for Windows and want those passwords accessible by the 64 bit version You run imagew altregview 64 to migrate the settings From this point on the settings are saved in the 64 bit registry and accessible by both versions of the program Default if omitted Clean installations of Image for Windows 2 94 and later on 64 bit versions of Windows will use the 64 bit registry settings regardless of whether the 32 bit Image for Windows User Manual Page 134 of 227 or 64 bit version of the progr
179. he minimum space required to copy just as if it wasn t excluded Each line in the exclusion file should be in the following format options path gt Valid options are Exclude files only Do not delete folders If not specified folders will be deleted Image for Windows User Manual Page 191 of 227 t Truncate files instead of deleting them Folders will not be deleted Files will have a size of zero bytes k Keep the base folder If not specified the base folder will be deleted The path can be complete to exclude a specific folder e g Games or you can use wildcards to specify matching files When excluding a folder use a trailing backslash to indicate a folder is specified otherwise a search will be made for matching files Do not surround the path with quotes even if it includes spaces Do not specify a drive letter To also exclude files from subdirectories apply recursion include the gt greater than character after the path Examples t jpg exclude all jpg files in the root folder files will be truncated iso exclude all iso files in the root folder Backups tbi exclude all tbi files in the Backups folder k Games gt exclude the Games folder and all sub folders keep the Games folder use trailing backslash to indicate folder Work Archive exclude the Work Archive folder sub folders not excluded use trailing backslash to indicate folder
180. he partition you select will be deleted before Image for DOS restores the image 9 Onthe Restore Options screen that appears select the options you want to use while restoring For an explanation of each option see the next two sections Image for DOS Restore Options for an Entire Drive on Page 78 and Image for DOS Restore Options for an Individual Partition on Page 82 10 Onthe Summary screen that appears click Start when you are ready to begin the restore process During the restore process a progress bar appears on screen A message appears when Image for DOS finishes After you press Enter the main menu for Image for DOS reappears At this point if you are finished using Image for DOS select Exit remove the Image for DOS boot media and then press Enter to reboot your computer Note Until you reboot the operating system reflects the contents of the drive partition and file system in the state they were before you restored Not rebooting can cause data corruption You can override the reboot prompt by restoring using the command line rb 0 switch but do this only if you are an advanced user and understand the potential ramifications of not rebooting Image for DOS Restore Options for an Entire Drive You can set options to restore an image if you choose the Normal option instead of the Automatic option on the Restore Select screen The options you can set while restoring using Image for DOS depend on w
181. heck this box to enable IO throttling on disk reads Throttle on Writes Check this box to enable IO throttling on disk writes Memory Use this option to control the amount of memory PHYLock allocates to its internal tracking buffers The furthest right location on the slider uses the most memory and covers worse case scenarios The furthest left location uses the least amount of memory and covers 1 8 of worse case The other two positions use 1 4 and 1 2 of worse case scenarios respectively If you receive an error saying that PHYLock requires more memory or that it failed to cache changes and you ve already increased the disk cache try increasing this setting Note that if PHYLock won t start due to not enough memory you may have to decease this setting or the RAM cache Write Free Time ms In this box type the amount of time in milliseconds that must pass before PHYLock becomes enabled During this time you cannot update the backup source partition contents You should try to keep the value above 1250 the default value is 4250 Max Wait Time M In this box type the maximum amount of time in minutes that you want PHYLock to wait for the Write Free Time to occur before forcing the backup to start Make sure you type an amount other than zero if you type 0 PHYLock waits indefinitely Image for Windows User Manual Page 43 of 227 RAM Cache Size KB In this box type the size of the internal cache in kilobytes you
182. hen the use of each such reparation or partition management change is likewise subject to all of the conditions and restrictions of this Agreement including without limitation restriction of use of such reparation or partition management change to Computer Systems licensed hereunder 2 TERM AND TERMINATION This Agreement and your license rights hereunder remain effective until this Agreement is terminated a Termination by You You may terminate it at any time by destroying the distribution media together with all of your copies of the Software in any form b Termination for Breach This Agreement may be terminated by TeraByte upon notice at its sole discretion if you fail to completely remedy any breach by you of any term or condition herein within ten 10 days after notice of such breach is delivered by TeraByte to you c Automatic Termination This Agreement will automatically terminate without notice if your normal business operations are disrupted or discontinued for more than thirty days by reason of insolvency bankruptcy receivership or business termination Upon termination of this Agreement you must destroy all copies of the Software in any form 3 OWNERSHIP AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION TeraByte or its licensors own the Software under copyright trade secret and all other laws that may apply All product names designs and logos associated with the Software are trademarks of TeraByte The source code of the Software and
183. her portions of the MBR i e the partition table disk signature s etc will not be affected Otherwise Image for DOS will install the standard master boot code only when it appears that there is no existing boot code Restore Disk Signature This option applies when you restore a partition that had been assigned a drive letter within Windows prior to being backed up If you select this option Image for DOS will restore the disk signature associated with the source partition If you don t select this option Image for DOS will use the disk signature already present in the MBR of the target drive if none exists Image for DOS will create one If you are restoring a partition that had been assigned a drive letter in Windows and you wish to keep that drive letter assignment select this option Restore First Track Whenever you back up any partition Image for DOS also backs up the first track of the source hard drive If you select this option Image for DOS will restore the first track which includes the master boot code and the disk signature enabling you to restore the MBR EMBR Restoring the first track may also change the disk type MBR EMBR GPT of the destination drive if it doesn t match that of the source drive the restore will abort if the change is required and cannot be applied Validate Before Restore If you select this option Image for DOS will validate the image file s prior to restoring them If Image for DOS en
184. hes back to a Normal restore operation where you select the target drive and partition as well as restore options 9 Ifyou are restoring from CD DVD BD discs insert the first disc in the backup set 10 Onthe Summary screen that appears select Start when you are ready to begin the restore process A progress bar appears on screen You can interrupt the backup and validation operations at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing the Esc key Image for Windows will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel before it interrupts the current operation While the restore is in process you can change the power options and process priority options using the drop down boxes The default power option is Auto which will prompt to reboot when finished if a reboot is necessary If the selected power option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown Select Exit Only to Image for Windows User Manual Page 94 of 227 have Image for Windows exit when finished The selected process priority will remain in effect until the program ends or is changed manually Note If Image for Windows reports that it cannot obtain a lock you ll need to restore using the Image for DOS or Image for Linux recovery boot disk or using Image for Windows from a preinstallation environment disc such as Bart PE TBWinPE or TBWinRE as mentioned earlier Geometry Settings When you u
185. hether you restore an entire drive or a partition When you restore an entire drive Image for DOS offers these options that you can set Image for Windows User Manual Page 78 of 227 Image for DOS GUI 297e i Options CI wite Changed Sectors On First Track Sectors nte ili ectors Oniy AUTO CO Scale to Fit C Align to Target C Change Disk ID and GUIDs O Validate Before Restore O Validate Byte for Byte O write Standard MBA Code O wipe Unused Sectors C Remove Gaps on Restore C GPT Hidden From OS C Assume Original HD C Scale to Target CO Ignore I0 Errors C Disable Auto Eject C Reboot when Completed I Shutdown when Completed ka Save Defaults Show Command Update Boot Partition This option updates any references to the restored partition in the active boot partition on the target drive This is useful for situations where the boot partition differs from the system partition However you typically wouldn t want to use this option if you re creating a copy of an existing partition you want to keep unless the target drive will be independent of the original drive For this to be useful the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or part of the same copy or restore operation Note This option is not displayed if the Automatic Boot Partition Update global option is enabled the default TeraByte Unlimited Write Changed Sectors Only Enable this option when restoring
186. hile using Windows TBIView View and extract files IFW Notify System tray utility TBICD2HD Copy files from directly burned discs BINGBURN Burn image files to CD DVD BD discs Image for Windows User Manual Page 23 of 227 10 Click Install and the Installing window appears A progress bar shows installation progress When installation completes the final window of the Image for Windows Installation Wizard appears If you opted to install MakeDisk or to run the TBIView Setup Wizard the final window of the Image for Windows Installation wizard won t appear until you complete the other tasks you selected If you opted to install MakeDisk skip to Step 2 of the section Creating a Bootable Image for DOS Disc for detailed steps on using MakeDisk to create the Image for DOS bootable media jB Setup Image for Windows V2 Emmm Completing the Image for Windows V2 Setup Wizard To complete the installation of Image for Windows V2 Setup must restart your computer Would you like to restart now Yes restart the computer now No will restart the computer later 11 Since the installation won t be complete until you restart your computer we recommend that you click the Yes restart the computer now option and click Finish If you opt not to install PHY Lock or if you already had the latest version of PHYLock installed when you started the installation you don t
187. i _ Anni 7 4 Click the Schedule tab and then click the New button to create a schedule for the backup task Note If you close the task window without first setting a schedule for it the task will be deleted immediately Image for Windows User Manual Page 206 of 227 Image for Windows Task 1 Schedule Settings 1 At 9 00 AM every day starting 1 22 2010 v 5 Click the Settings tab Configure the task settings as desired Note If the computer will be sleeping at the time backup should begin make sure to enable the Wake the computer to run this task option Image for Windows User Manual Page 207 of 227 a 2 je Task Schedule Settings Scheduled Task Completed Delete the task ff it is not scheduled to run again V Stop the task if it runs for 72 hour s 0 Idle Time Only start the task if the computer has been idle for at least minute s f the computer has not been idle that long retry for up to minute s E Stop the task if the computer ceases to be idle Power Management F Dont start the task if the computer is running on batteries __ Stop the task if battery mode begins Wake the computer to run this task 6 Click OK or Apply You will be prompted to enter account information 7 Supply the desired user name and password Set Account Infor
188. ides an easy way to wipe a drive and restore in a single operation Such as when deploying images to used systems Default if omitted Image for Windows will not perform any wiping of unused sectors Image for Windows User Manual Page 173 of 227 mp MultiPass 1 Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to use Multi Pass mode when restoring a differential or incremental backup In Multi Pass mode Image for Windows restores the full backup in one pass and then restores the differential backup in a second pass or incrementals in multiple passes This setting is not applicable when restoring a full backup You must use this option if the applicable full backup resides on removable media Default if omitted Image for Windows uses Single Pass mode restoring the full backup and the differential backup or incremental backups in one pass cds N A Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to query all available CD DVD BD drives when trying to locate the appropriate source backup Default if omitted You must explicitly specify the CD DVD BD drive that contains the source backup mo N A Instructs Image for Windows to display the following message immediately upon running Press the lt space bar gt for the menu interface or wait for the restore to start If you press the space bar while this message appears Image for Windows will switch to interactive mode and wait for you to initiate the restore oper
189. iffers from that of the source drive but you plan to subsequently move the target drive so that its number matches the source drive again enabling this option can be beneficial Ignore IO Errors Under ordinary circumstances if Image for DOS encounters a bad sector on the target drive while restoring an image Image for DOS will notify you concerning the write error and give you the option to continue or abort If you select the Ignore IO Errors option Image for DOS will ignore the error and continue Generally you should select this option only if you need to restore to a target drive that contains known bad sectors On some systems if you select this setting and Image for DOS encounters bad sectors there will be a significant delay as the internal retry recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector s In addition some systems may hang if the BIOS option is used to access the source drive In such cases try using the BIOS Direct option instead Disable Auto Eject This option prevents Image for DOS from automatically opening the optical drive tray If you don t select this option Image for DOS will open the drive tray whenever a disc is needed and at the completion of the restore operation Image for Windows User Manual Page 84 of 227 Reboot When Completed Use this option to automatically reboot your computer after the restore finishes Shutdown When Completed Use this option to automatically shut d
190. ignature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the d and before the source hard drive number w Windows device v Virtual drive Drive letter follows The d option cannot be used with the base option base N A Use when performing a differential or incremental backup to identify the backup on which Image for Windows should base this backup base x bkup base x mypath bkup pase x my path bkup Or base d p bkup pase d p mypath bkup pase d p my path bkup pase ntsig p mypath bkup base GUID p mypath bkup X is source drive letter mypath or my path is path to bkup bkup is name of existing backup omit file extension Or Specify source device partition path and file name d is source hard drive number p is source partition ID hex or decimal notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the base and before the source hard drive number w Windows Device Image for Windows User Manual Page 153 of 227 o Optical drive v Virtual drive Whether using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of quotes The base option cannot be used with the d option
191. iii Transfer of Installation physically transfer any installed licensed copy of the Software from one Computer System the Old System to another Computer System the New System provided that that copy may be installed on only one Computer System at a time and further provided that when you make the transfer you must uninstall and remove any and all copies of the Software from the Computer System from which the programs are transferred Where uninstalling from the Old System is impossible due to such Old System being damaged or otherwise non functional the requirement for such uninstall and removal shall be waived unless and until such Old System becomes functional Such transfer shall be permitted a when the New System is a replacement for the Old System or b with written approval from TeraByte Unless otherwise authorized by TeraByte in writing each licensed copy of the Software shall be licensed for one and only one Computer System Such shall be the case whether or not the Software is installed on a disk drive permanently attached to the Computer System for which the Software may be licensed Specifically installation upon portable media including without limitation flash drives and CDs shall not circumvent the requirement of maintaining a license for the Software on each Computer System on which the Software may be used although it is permissible for Software installed upon a portable drive or other drive accessible from multip
192. iles V PE Builder PE plugin builder for BartPE VistaPE and Win7RescuePE V PartInfo View or Export partition information Current selection requires at least 101 4 MB of disk space cnet The optional components you can install include PHYLock A free add on that enables Image for Windows to create a consistent reliable backup of a partition or volume that is in use also called an unlocked partition or volume We recommend that you install PHYLock so that you can back up a Windows volume while using it TBIView A free add on you can use to view and extract individual files from image backups you ve created Includes TBIMount IFW Notify A system tray utility that provides notifications of Image for Windows operations and provides easy access to the summary log It can also be configured to notify you if a backup hasn t completed successfully in the specified number of days TBICD2HD A free command line utility you can use to copy to your hard drive TeraByte image files that were directly burned to optical discs BINGBURN A free utility you can use to burn previously created TeraByte image files to CD DVD or BD discs BurnCDCC A free utility that provides a quick easy way to write CD DVD or BD ISO files to optical discs Image for Windows User Manual Page 19 of 227 PE Builder A free utility you can use to integrate Image for Windows into BartPE or VistaPE which are standalone Wi
193. iles are truncated files will exist but all have a size of zero bytes 3 Excluded files and folders are deleted This option does not delete base folders specified to keep in the exclusion list Default if omitted Image for Windows truncates or deletes the excluded files as specified in the exclusion list WCO WriteChangedSecsOnly 1 Use this option when restoring to write only the changed sectors to the target drive target will be read to compare Useful in cases where a large portion of the data is the same and it s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive e g restoring image to SSD drive Default if omitted Image for Windows will write all restored sectors normally log 0 SaveLog 0 Disables logging Image for Windows User Manual Page 177 of 227 Default if omitted Image for Windows logs during a restore operation Image for Windows Validate Options In Table 7 you find the command line options that you must set to use Image for Windows to validate an image The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Validate_Defaults section unless as noted otherwise Table 7 Image for Windows Required Validate Parameters Command Line Option
194. ineer decompile disassemble or create derivative works based on the Software v copy the Software except as expressly permitted above vi rent lease grant a security interest in or otherwise transfer rights to or possession of the Software or any copy thereof unless properly licensed by TeraByte under another agreement that specifically permits such action vii remove or alter any proprietary notices labels or legends on any copy of the Software viii ship or transmit directly or indirectly any copies of the Software or their media or any direct product thereof to any country or destination prohibited by the United States Government or ix disclose serial numbers or registration codes to others unless they are properly licensed to receive such information either under this Agreement or another agreement from TeraByte c PERMITTED END USERS AND COMPUTER SYSTEMS i Commercial or Organizational Use f you are a corporation LLC or other commercial entity whether public or private for profit or not for profit or a government entity or if the Software is ever used for purposes related to any such commercial or government entity the permitted Software end users and Computer Systems under this license are as applicable 1 Your own employees and in house contractors and your in house Computer Systems owned or controlled by you 2 A parent organization that has majority ownership or control of your organization if
195. ing Creates a VirtualPC Dynamic Expanding virtual hard drive Image for Windows User Manual Page 32 of 227 VHD Fixed Size Creates a VirtualPC Fixed Size virtual hard drive e VHDX Dynamic Expanding Creates a Hyper V Dynamic Expanding virtual hard drive e VHDxX Fixed Size Creates a Hyper V Fixed Size virtual hard drive e VHDX Dynamic 4KiB Sector Size Creates a Hyper V Dynamic Expanding virtual hard drive with a sector size of 4KiB 4096 bytes e VHDX Fixed Size 4KiB Sector Size Creates a Hyper V Fixed Size virtual hard drive with a sector size of 4KiB 4096 bytes e VMDK Monolithic Sparse IDE Creates a VMWare Sparse IDE virtual hard drive e VMDK Monolithic Sparse SCSI Creates a VMWare Sparse SCSI virtual hard drive l Dynamic expanding virtual drives append data to the file as you add data to the virtual drive The file size starts small and grows as needed Fixed size virtual drives allocate data for the file when it s created and the file size does not change The file size will be the same as the virtual drive size e g a 40GiB virtual drive will use 40GiB of space 3 For Windows caching reasons it is highly recommended to create partitions within a VHDX file that are aligned on at least a 1MiB boundary That is either 2048 sectors for 512 byte sized sectors or 256 sectors for 4096 byte sized sectors 6 Click Next The window that appear
196. ing an image The value n can be 1 to reboot with all prompts 2 to reboot with completion message but without reboot message error does not cancel reboot 4 to reboot without completion message or reboot message error cancels reboot 8 to shutdown 16 to suspend sleep or 32 to hibernate If the specified option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown If suspend or hibernate is requested and a shutdown or reboot is required a shutdown is performed instead Default if omitted Image for Windows attempts to determine if the computer needs to be rebooted after restoring and if so prompts you to reboot fd ForceDismount 1 Use this option to force dismounting a volume partition that can t be locked for restore Using this option will invalidate all opened handles to the volume which may result in lost data Image for Windows will attempt to lock the volume after forcing the dismount Default if omitted Normal locking without forcing a dismount occurs sp p N A Use this option to specify an individual partition ID to restore from a full backup p is the Image for Windows User Manual Page 166 of 227 source partition ID in hex or decimal notation Default if omitted If you supply a backup of an entire hard drive as the source for restoring Image for Windows will restore all partitions contained in the backup sig ReplaceNT Sig 1
197. ing the backup operation The value n can be 1 to reboot with all prompts 2 to reboot with completion message but without reboot message error does not cancel reboot 4 to reboot without completion message or reboot message error cancels reboot 8 to shutdown 16 to suspend sleep or 32 to hibernate If the specified option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown Default if omitted Image for Windows attempts to determine if the computer needs to be rebooted after completing the backup and if so prompts you to reboot bc BackwardsCompatible 1 Current versions of Image for Windows may use a TBI format that is not compatible with prior versions Enable this option to have Image for Windows create the TBI file using a format that is compatible with version 2 50 If desired also use bcl BackwardsCompatibleLevel to specify a more current file version Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the current TBI format md MakeDir 1 This option causes Image for Windows to always create the target path if doesn t exist Default if omitted Image for Windows doesn t attempt to create the target path mp MultiPass 1 Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to use Multi Pass mode when creating a differential or incremental backup In Multi Pass mode Image for Windows compares the source partition against the full backup in one pass and perform
198. ion of an operation errors or when user interaction is required insert media etc Disable Resize with Caching Select to prevent Image for DOS from using a cache to reduce the time required to resize a partition By default the Resize with Caching option is enabled Note The above options are also available in Image for DOS by clicking the Settings button IFD GUI or selecting Global Settings IFD CUI 8 Click Next and the Additional IFD INI Options screen appears Most of the options you should set to use Image for DOS are set for you by default but you can use this screen to set additional options For example you might want to use the TimeZone variable to identify your time zone for Image for DOS Or you might want the Scale to Fit option enabled by default to expand partitions when restoring Note that for non global options those not in the Options section you will need to specify the section e g Restore Defaults See image below for examples For a complete list of available environment variables see the section titled Image for DOS Environment Variables in the Image for DOS manual meae y tat MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 m Additional IFD INI Options optional Separate multiple options with semicolons TimeZone ESTSEDT More IR estore_Defaults Expand 1 More A lt lt Previous i Copyright 2004 2011 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Image for Windo
199. ion of an extended partition only selects the individual volumes Default if omitted Image for Windows uses linked checkboxes acc Accessible 1 Changes the checklist boxes to be compatible with screen readers 0 Normal check boxes 1 Screen reader accessible check boxes Default if omitted Image for Windows uses normal check boxes shownet n ShowNetwork n Determines if the Entire Network option is available in the file location tree dialog box You d use this option to disable the Entire Network option if searching the network for Image for Windows User Manual Page 126 of 227 servers and shares takes too much time 0 No 1 Yes Default if omitted Image for Windows displays the Entire Network option cdbins n CDBIns n Determines which CD Boot Instruction file to use O Image for DOS cdboot ifd 1 Image for Linux cdboot ifl 2 Custom CDBOOT INS Default if omitted Image for DOS option is used nocan NoCancel 1 Tells Image for Windows not to permit use of the F12 key to cancel the backup restore validate or copy operation once it has begun Default if omitted You can use the F12 key to cancel the current operation w7mbr 0 Win7MBR 0 Windows Vista and later tied the kernel loader to the MBR code such that using previous MBR code may not allow Windows Vista or later to boot on certain machines By default Image for Windows uses the code base compatible with Windo
200. ion on the Select the optional components screen to include that file in the Image for DOS bootable disc or diskette If creating the Image for DOS GUI boot media the next steps will allow you to select mouse and video options 5 If you selected Simple in Step 2 skip to Step 7 Otherwise enable the desired options on the Device and Checkbox Options screen Click Next and the Global Geometry Options screen appears followed by the Miscellaneous Global Options screen See the section Creating a Bootable Image for DOS Disc on Page 61 for a detailed description of these options 6 Click Next and the Additional IFD INI Options screen appears Most of the options needed to use Image for DOS are set for you by default but you can use this screen to set additional options Image for Windows User Manual Page 11 of 227 7 Click Next and the License screen appears If you own a licensed copy of Image for DOS supply your product key 8 Click Next and the Select Target screen appears Choose the target that MakeDisk should use to create the bootable Image for DOS media You can create a bootable USB flash drive UFD with MakeDisk as long as the UFD is not larger than 64 GB 9 Click Finish and respond to subsequent prompts as necessary MakeDisk will then create your bootable media or ISO image When MakeDisk finishes the Success screen appears 1
201. ion to have Image for Windows request that the computer hibernate after completing the restore operation If a shutdown or reboot is required a shutdown is performed instead If multiple power options are selected precedence is as follows suspend hibernate shutdown reboot Scale to Fit This option only applies to full drive restores On FAT FAT32 NTFS or EXT 2 3 4 file systems selecting this option will make Image for Windows assume that the size of the original hard drive is based on the location of the end of the last partition Image for Windows then applies the same scaling to the target hard drive If any unpartitioned space existed at the end of the source drive that unpartitioned space won t exist on the target drive after you restore your image This option has no effect on images restored to hard drives using other file systems You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to Target option If you inadvertently enable both options Scale to Fit will take precedence Align to Target This option only applies to full drive restores If you select this option Image for Windows will force alignment to the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive For example if the Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries global option is enabled the restored drive will be aligned on 1MiB boundaries If this option is not selected the alignment used on the target drive will be determined automatically based
202. irtual Drives TeraByte Unlimited Add Virtual Drive Information Geometry Create Extended Change Disk ie While on this screen the following functions are available Right click on a drive or partition to open the context menu Select Details to view information about the drive partition To delete a partition se lect Delete and then confirm the action check the Aggressive Delete box if a normal attempt fails and you need to force the deletion Note You can also delete the partition by selecting it and pressing the Del key Information Click to view the details of the selected drive partition or virtual drive e g number of MiB used free and needed to restore Geometry Click to set the geometry for the selected target drive more about this function in the Geometry Settings section below Create Extended Click after selecting a free space partition to cre extended partition You can then restore the backup to that partition Read ate an Change Disk Click to change the drive type This allows you to change the partitioning scheme used on the drive MBR EMBR and GPT drive types are supported Image for Windows User Manual Page 92 of 227 e Add Virtual Drive Click to add a virtual drive while working in Image for Windows You can use Image for Windows to back up to or restore from a virtual drive used in conjunction with VirtualPC
203. isk type MBR EMBR GPT of the destination drive if it doesn t match that of the source drive the restore will abort if the change is required and cannot be applied Change GUID When restoring to a GPT drive selecting this option will change the GUID of each partition restored Validate Before Restore If you select this option Image for Windows will validate the image file s prior to restoring them and perform internal consistency checks on the backup file s If Image for Windows encounters an error during validation Image for Windows will a bort the restore operation without overwriting the partition If you select this option the overall processing time Image for Windows takes to restore the image will increase but you can restore the image with greater certainty that the restored image will be reliable Validate Byte for Byte If you select this option Image for Windows will verify that every byte in the source backup image file was written back to the drive correctly ensuring 100 accuracy This option generally increases the processing time of the overall backup operation but we advise you use this option where maximum reliability is required Wipe Unused Sectors This option will wipe zero out unused sectors in the restored partition s or drive depending on the type of restore performed Image for Windows User Manual Page 98 of 227 When restoring single partitions or when restoring multiple partitions to a
204. ith bad sectors or an error occurred This allows the rest of the user interactive prompts to continue to work normally whereas with uy or un they would be auto answered Default if omitted The completion message will be displayed on success un N A Use this parameter to perform an unattended backup and tell Image for Windows to assume the answer to all Yes No prompts is No the answer to all OK Cancel messages is Cancel and the answer to all Abort Retry Ignore prompts is Abort Image for Windows then terminates the backup process when the first Yes No prompt appears This option should be placed just after the action parameter b r v to ensure this parameter is in effect for prompts that may occur in other command line options If desired you may override the effect of un for Abort Retry Ignore prompts by also supplying the ui parameter See the description of the ui parameter below for more information This option is disabled when additional media is needed file not found and um is not specified Default if omitted Image for Windows does not run an unattended backup uy N A Use this parameter to perform an unattended backup and tell Image for Windows to assume the answer to all Yes No prompts is Yes the answer to all OK Cancel messages is OK and the answer to all Abort Retry Ignore prompts is Ignore This option should be placed just after the action parameter b r v to ensure this parameter is in eff
205. ition s description Image for Windows 2 86 al Select the hard drive or partitions to backup Computer HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 J System Reserved 100 MiB HPFS NTFS 04 active IIH C Win7 38810 MiB HPFS NTFS 02 M Recovery 2047 MiB HPFS NTFS 03 HD 1 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 E Data 40957 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E M Virtual Drives TeraByte Unlimited Add Virtual Drive Information Compact Note Under certain configurations hard drive numbers may be different under DOS than they are under Windows or other environments The basic format for running Image for Windows from the command line is imagew action options Valid values for action are Image for Windows User Manual Page 124 of 227 B Backup R Restore Copy Copy V Validate L List partitions optical drives or file contents Combine Combine incrementals with the base image REBOOT Reboot system When you specify command line options you precede each option by typing the slash character For example you might type the following at the command prompt to create a backup using Image for Windows The command specifies the source drive and partition the target drive and partition and the backup filename imagew b d 0 0x01 f 1 0x01 mypath filename The first parameter b identifies that yo
206. ition the restored partition begins where the unallocated space begins Disk images are treated differently than partition images When restoring a disk image you will not be notified if the image won t fit after selecting the destination drive Instead you must proceed to the options screen and click Next The reason for this is that alignment options or one of the scaling options Scale to Fit or Scale to Target may be used which could change the requirements The actual space necessary cannot be determined until the state of all options are known Note Mounting an image will not allow you to obtain the minimum size required for a restore Removing Unwanted Programs and Files Once you have determined the space that will required to restore or copy to the new smaller drive or partition you ll Know how much data will need to be removed to allow it to fit In many cases this will require deleting large data files archives ISO downloads installers videos music etc You may also need to uninstall certain programs planning to reinstall them to a different partition when needed It should be noted that deleting files from a partition may not lower the minimum required size to restore the partition since data may still exist at previous furthest in use location on the partition Check the space required after deleting files to determine the current size If moving to an extremely small drive like a small SSD you will likely
207. ition or a hard drive This recovery media plays an important role in your use of Image for Windows It is particularly useful if either your hard drive or the partition you use to boot become unusable You use the MakeDisk utility to create the recovery boot media Boot Media and UEFI Systems Computer systems that come from the manufacturer with Windows 8 installed include a new BIOS interface known as the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI This new BIOS interface boots media differently than a traditional BIOS Microsoft also requires these systems to use a feature of UEFI called Secure Boot When Secure Boot is enabled the system will only boot items that have a digital signature that is included in the system firmware The manufacturers include a digital certificate provided by Microsoft to boot Windows on their systems Secure boot can be disabled on non ARM systems to allow you to boot other operating systems and environments Boot media must be specifically created for UEFI to allow UEFI to boot from it However most systems also include the ability to boot traditional boot media though a method or mode typically called Legacy or BIOS Using TeraByte Boot Media on UEFI Systems When creating the boot media for a UEFI system it s important to understand which media will boot properly on the UEFI system System settings may require changing to boot Image for Linux or Image for DOS depending on the implementation of UEFI on th
208. its restored value Restoring a Backup with Image for Windows You can use Image for Windows to restore an image as long as you are not trying to restore the image to the copy of Windows you are currently using Image for Windows can restore images to partitions not in use To use Image for Windows to restore an image of a Windows installation when you have no other operating systems available you can Use Image for DOS as described in the preceding two sections Use Image for Linux as described in the Image for Linux manual Use TBWinPE or TBWinRE TBWinPE is based on the Windows AIK ADK requires download from Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows 8 users can easily create TBWinRE boot media does not require downloading the Windows AIK ADKk and add Image for Windows to the Windows Recovery Environment The TBWinRE files are automatically installed in the towinre sub folder of the Image for Windows installation folder and can be accessed there or from the Image for Windows User Manual Page 85 of 227 Create Recovery Boot Disk shortcut in the Start menu Tutorials for creating TBWinPE and TBWinRE boot media can be found on TeraByte s website Use the PE Builder Plugin Installer and create a Bart PE or other WinPE based bootable Windows CD DVD that also contains Image for Windows When you boot your computer using this CD DVD you boot to a Windows preinstallation environment state where you can use Image for Windows to restor
209. ividual Use Original Geometry override Disable Validate Geometry Before Use This option is enabled by default and used to ensure that the geometry from the MBR on the original system is aligned to known standards before accepting it for use It only applies when Assume Same Target System is enabled Check this box to disable this option Note The above options are also available in Image for DOS by clicking the Settings button IFD GUI or selecting Global Settings IFD CUI Image for Windows User Manual Page 68 of 227 7 Click Next and the Miscellaneous Global Options screen appears tat MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 S m Miscellaneous Global Options optional Simple Operations Use Windows 9x MBR Disable Automatic Scaling Restrictions M Disable Automatic Boot Partition Updates Disable Automatic Restore Drive Search 7 Retain Failed Backups Completion Alarm Disable Resize with Caching Cancel lt lt Previous Copyright 2004 2015 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Check boxes to enable the options Simple Operations Enable this option to have Image for DOS automatically handle most options for you You simply choose which physical drive you want to back up and if needed which drive you want to save to the target storage area is automatically maintained and files are deleted as needed when it runs out of free space Backup Restore Validate and Copy
210. k partition images or otherwise copy one or more partitions Images then the use of each Image is subject to all of the conditions and restrictions of this Agreement Your rights to create and distribute Images are based on the Software licensed and the type of license you purchased as may be indicated on your sales receipt or comparable sales documentation received by you from TeraByte i PER COMPUTER IMAGE LICENSE Each licensed copy of the Software includes without extra charge a per computer license to create and keep Images for the same Computer System s on which you are licensed to use the Software itself those Images may not be distributed to or used in any manner with any other computers except for direct replacements for such systems as provided in subsection 1 a iii above nor may you create or retain images for additional Computer Systems unless the previously created images are destroyed or you purchased additional licenses to cover such Computer Systems You may create and keep an unlimited number of Images for each licensed Computer System For example if you purchased a license for five 5 copies of the Software then you may create and keep an unlimited number of Images for up to five Computer Systems with which you properly use those 5 Software copies as described in 1 a i and 1 a ii above but you may not distribute those Images to or use them with any other Computer System ii IMAGE DEPLOYMENT LI
211. ke no action after PHYLock starts After the backup finishes Image for Windows will restart my service waiting a maximum of 10000 milliseconds after completing the backup Note Image for Windows will process services ins if it exists unless you include the ignsvc switch on the command line or the IgnoreServices parameter in the IFW INI file to ignore services ins Image for Windows User Manual Page 123 of 227 Running Image for Windows from the Command Line You can run Image for Windows IMAGEW EXE from the command line Be sure to separate the command line options with spaces or colons When run under Windows Vista or Windows 7 Image for Windows will trigger a UAC prompt if UAC is enabled When running Image for Windows from the command line you might need to include references to hard drive numbers and or partition IDs To determine the correct hard drive number or partition ID complete Steps 1 through 4 in the section Creating a Full Backup making sure that you select the hard drive whose number and or partition IDs you need to obtain The hard drive number will then appear in the format HD n e g HD 0 or HD 1 The partition ID appears in parenthesis at the end of each partition description and consists of either two or four characters In the figure the first hard drive HD 0 has two partitions and their numbers 01 and 02 appear in parentheses at the end of each part
212. l Shutdown when Completed Optimal Mogae Disc Suspend when Completed Sine Limit Usage Hibernate when Completed Disable TRIM Backwards Compatible Validate Disc If you check this option Image for Windows will validate each disc after writing the disc to ensure that the disc is readable If the disc is not readable Image for Windows User Manual Page 52 of 227 you can have Image for Windows write the individual disc again without restarting the entire backup Limit Usage Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to leave the last 10 of each disc unused to help prevent data errors that occur near the edges of discs Drop Down List to Set Maximum CD DVD Burning Speed Use this list to specify the maximum disc writing speed that Image for Windows should use when burning a CD or DVD disc You can force a lower writing speed than that automatically used by the optical drive s firmware slower writing speeds may increase reliability The maximum writing speed that Image for Windows actually uses is determined by whichever is ower the setting you select here or the speed deemed appropriate by the drive s firmware according to the CD DVD BD media in use For example if you are using media that is rated at 8X for burning the maximum writing speed will be no more than 8X regardless of the setting you choose here Similarly if you supply a value that is higher than or invalid for the drive s design limits the drive
213. l take precedence First Track Sectors This text box allows you to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive should be restored If you enter AUTO in this box the tracks needed for the EMBR will be restored If you aren t sure type AUTO in this box Resize After Restore Currently available only for FAT FAT32 NTFS and EXT 2 3 4 partitions you can use this text box to specify a new size for the restored partition bound by the Minimum and Maximum values specified by Image for Windows The units used here are mebibytes abbreviated MiB Please refer to the section titled Data Storage Size Unit Conventions at the beginning of this manual for more information New Name Enter the new volume name label for the restored partition If left blank the name will not be changed from its restored value Save Defaults Click this button to save the settings you establish In the future Image for Windows will display these settings automatically Show Command Click this button to display the information you would type at a command prompt to start a restore with the options you selected as you displayed the various windows in Image for Windows You can use this information to create a batch file or TBScript TBS file that runs Image for Windows by selecting the Save to File option The command line can be edited before being saved For details on using Image for Windows from a command prompt see the section R
214. le Computer Systems to be executed upon more than one such system provided that licenses are maintained for each Computer System on which such Software may be executed iv Backup Copy make a copy of each licensed copy of the Software solely for purposes of backup v Images create and keep per computer Images as described in paragraph 1 e i below if the Software product as licensed provides imaging functionality and vi Image Deployment if you paid for additional Image Deployment license rights create and distribute additional Images as described in paragraph 1 e ii below Image for Windows User Manual Page 224 of 227 PROVIDED IN ALL CASES THAT all copyright and other proprietary and Federal acquisition notices as included by TeraByte with the Software be fully and accurately reproduced by you on any and all copies of the Software b YOU MAY NOT i permit others to use the Software unless they are properly licensed by TeraByte either under this Agreement or another agreement from TeraByte nor install or use the Software on any computer or computer related device except Computer Systems as authorized in a above ii under a single use license install a copy of the Software on one Computer System and also use it on one or more other Computer Systems no less than a two 2 copy license would be required for such use iii permit concurrent use of any copy of the Software iv modify translate reverse eng
215. le to restore that image using a registered version of Image for DOS Image for Linux or Image for Windows If you are currently using an older version of Image for Windows you do not need to uninstall it before installing Image for Windows 2 0 In fact you may want to keep your older version for awhile Image for Windows 2 0 can restore only those backups you create using Image for Windows 2 0 to restore backups you made using older versions of Image for Windows you need those versions You should update older versions to Image for Windows 1 7c or later so that your older version will be compatible with the version of PHYLock installed by Version 2 0 Image for Windows User Manual Page 14 of 227 Installing Image for Windows You install Image for Windows the same way you install most Windows programs 1 Run the setup program you downloaded from the link provided above by double clicking it This will trigger a UAC prompt on Windows Vista and Windows 7 if UAC is enabled Select to allow the program to run The Welcome to the Image for Windows V2 Setup Wizard screen appears j5 Setup Image for Windows V2 Se Welcome to the Image for Windows V2 Setup Wizard This will install Image for Windows 2 96 on your computer It is recommended that you dose all other applications before continuing Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup Image for Windows User Manual Page 15 of 227
216. lected destination contains data Image for Windows displays a warning that indicates that all data in the partition or on the drive that you selected in Step 4 will be overwritten and lost Image for Windows User Manual Page 108 of 227 Warning j WARNING All data in the following partitions on HD1 will be lost Partition 01 40957 MiB HPFS NTFS Are you sure you want to continue s n 6 Click Yes to display the Options window See Understanding Copy Options for a detailed description of each option 7 Select any options you want to use and click Next 8 Onthe Summary screen that appears click Start when you are ready to begin the Copy process A progress bar appears on screen You can interrupt the operation at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing the Esc key Image for Windows will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel before it interrupts the operation While the copy is in process you can change the power options and process priority options using the drop down boxes The default power option is Auto which will prompt to reboot when finished if a reboot is necessary If the selected power option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown Select Exit Only to have Image for Windows exit when finished The selected process priority will remain in effect until the program ends or is changed manually When Image for Window
217. led the system will only boot items that have a digital signature that is included in the system firmware The manufacturers include a digital certificate provided by Microsoft to boot Windows on their systems Secure boot can be disabled on non ARM systems to allow you to boot other operating systems and environments Boot media must be specifically created for UEFI to allow UEFI to boot from it However most systems also include the ability to boot traditional boot media though a method or mode typically called Legacy or BIOS Using TeraByte Boot Media on UEFI Systems When creating the boot media for a UEFI system it s important to understand which media will boot properly on the UEFI system System settings may require changing to boot Image for Linux or Image for DOS depending on the implementation of UEFI on the system e TBWinRE the Image for Windows boot media supports booting via CD or USB flash drive on UEFI systems Secure Boot is supported and the BIOS can be in either UEFI mode or Legacy mode TBWinRE is automatically installed with Image for Windows on Windows 7 8 or later You must run TBWinRE to create your boot media e Image for Linux IFL v2 79 or later supports booting via CD or USB flash drive on UEFI systems Secure Boot is not currently supported and must be disabled in the BIOS Attempting to boot with Secure Boot enabled will result in the boot being blocked e Image for DOS IFD will not boot on UEFI system
218. less the target drive will be independent of the original drive For this to be useful the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or part of the same copy or restore operation Default if omitted Image for Windows does not update the active boot partition igpt OSlgnoresGPT 1 Use this option when restoring to a GPT drive to indicate that the operating system being restored will not see the destination drive as GPT when booted For example an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the OxEE placeholder partition is missing from the MBR This option prevents Image for Windows from using GPT specific fix up information on the drive after the restore Default if omitted Image for Windows will use GPT specific fix up information on GPT drives wipe Wipe 1 This option will wipe zero out unused sectors in the restored partition s or drive depending on the type of restore performed When restoring single partitions or when restoring multiple partitions to a drive with existing partitions sectors located outside of the restored partition s are not wiped If a partition is resized during the restore the wiped area for that partition is the final size of the restored partition not the size of the source partition When restoring a full drive or when restoring multiple partitions to a drive with no existing partitions the entire drive is wiped including all gaps between any partitions Using this option prov
219. lly after a removable media change CD DVD UFD etc When a media change is required a prompt will be displayed until the new media is detected at which time the operation will continue user input is not required If necessary the operation can be canceled when the prompt is displayed by using the Cancel button Default if omitted Image for Windows will require user input to continue when it prompts for a media change cdt CDCloseOptions 1 You can use this option when saving images to disc media CD DVD BD Forces media to be finalized when closed No further writing to disc is allowed Default if omitted Image for Windows will not finalize the disc when closed nousbpwrfix N A Use this option to prevent a short delay on Windows 8 0 8 1 systems when Image for Windows is run from the command line the delay is due to a workaround to fix a Windows USB power bug It is not recommended to use this option on affected systems if using USB drives as the drives may remain powered off and be unavailable to Image for Windows Default if omitted On Windows 8 0 8 1 systems there will be a short delay when Image for Windows runs an operation from the command line tcpdata 0 TCPData 0 Use this option when multicasting to prevent reading the file headers using TCP Default if omitted TCP will be used to read the file headers vblba VoIBPBLBA 1 Specify this option to use the actual LBA in a volume s BPB instea
220. lure of the Software to perform as warranted is caused by the Software being a not used in accordance with the user documentation or b modified by any person other than authorized TeraByte personnel EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTY GRANTED IMMEDIATELY ABOVE TERABYTE MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE ITS MERCHANTABILITY OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT YOU HAD FULL OPPORTUNITY TO USE AND TEST THE SOFTWARE BEFORE PURCHASE TERABYTE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR SELECTING AND USING THE SOFTWARE AND THAT IF YOU USE THE SOFTWARE IMPROPERLY OR AGAINST INSTRUCTIONS YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR FILES SOFTWARE DATA OR BUSINESS THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS BORNE BY YOU THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THE AGREEMENT Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusions of an implied warranty so this disclaimer may not apply to you and you may have other legal rights that vary by jurisdiction 5 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ANY LIABILITY OF TERABYTE WILL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE IN ADDITION INNO EVENT WILL TERABYTE NOR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR INDIRE
221. ly every 30 seconds Pending information except R_AUTO statistics will be sent upon reconnection Using this interface provides an easy method to monitor both local and remote operations Examples include e Consultants monitoring backups for clients e Enterprise logging monitoring of backups e Monitoring using custom interfaces The following table lists the available commands Commands are not case sensitive Each command sent must be terminated with CR LF Reports the program and version as shown in the title bar as two lines WHO Image for Windows User Manual Page 144 of 227 Image for Windows 2 75 R_INFO R_STATS Reports the information lines displayed during the operation The first line is INFO n where nis the number of lines to follow In the example below the fifth line is blank INFO 5 Creating image Processing Item 1 of 1 Backup Drive 0 C Win7 Partition 02 38810 MiB HPFS NTFS To e Backups Win7 2012 09 TBI This information is also sent automatically as it s updated during the operation Reports the progress and statistics of the current operation The first line is STATS n where nis the number of lines to follow STATS 6 6 3 1 483 44 182 0 00 00 54 23 minutes The statistics reported one per line are the current item progress overall progress MiB transferred MiB remaining time elapsed and time remaining R_AUTO n A_C
222. mage for Windows plugin for BartPE as well as the BartPE CD DVD itself Fortunately this is a simple process To create the Image for Windows BartPE plugin follow these steps 1 Choose Start All Programs Terabyte Unlimited Image for Windows V2 PE Builder Plugin Installer The PE Builder Plug In installer window will appear If you don t find this shortcut on your system run Image for Windows setup again being sure to select the component titled PE Builder PE plugin builder for BartPE VistaPE 2 Inthe PE Builder Location text box type in or navigate to the location where you installed BartPE i e the folder containing PEBUILDER EXE Your path may differ from the one shown in the figure below Image for Windows User Manual Page 86 of 227 Image for Windows PE Builder Plug In Eh Welcome to the PE Builder Plug In for Image for Windows This program will install the Image for Windows plug in to your existing Bart s PE Builder VistaPE or Win7PE directory Once installed you will be able to select Image for Windows in Bart s PE Builder VistaPE or Win7PE PE Builder Type Bart PE Windows XP Based v PE Builder Location Select the BartPE folder C pebuilder3110a for example C pebuilder3110a Ej Product Key Name User Name Key 000000 111111 222222 333333 444444 555555 666666 777777 8888 Run Image for Windows automatically V Preserve key for writable media
223. mage for DOS bootable recovery media at the same time that you installed Image for Windows When you create the recovery media while installing Image for Windows you skip Step 1 below Note For detailed steps on creating a bootable recovery disc see the section Creating a Bootable Image for DOS Disc on Page 61 1 Choose Start All Programs Terabyte Unlimited Image for Windows V2 Image for DOS Create Recovery Boot Disk This will trigger a UAC prompt in Windows Vista and Windows 7 if UAC is enabled Select to allow the program to run 2 Click Next on the MakeDisk welcome screen The Select the product to build screen appears Image for DOS can operate in simple or traditional mode Select the operating mode you wish to use the mode can be changed at any time in program settings and click Next 3 The License Agreement screen appears Read the Image for DOS license agreement and if you accept it select the I accept the agreement button and click Next 4 Ifyou are creating the Image for DOS GUI boot media or you ve placed a customized IFD INI file in the directory with the MakeDisk files the Select the optional components screen will be displayed Otherwise the Device and Checkbox Options screen will be shown skip to Step 5 Note If you have a copy of IFD INI in the folder where MAKEDISK EXE resides you can select the IFD INI file from local directory opt
224. mage for Windows doesn t display just highlight any Windows drive and continue to the next step 4 Image for Windows 2 86 SE Select where the backup file is located Computer E Windows Drives A C Win7 7 54GiB Free a 3 Entire Network CD DVD amp D SONY DVD RW AW Q170A H E HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 H E HD 4 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E C Virtual Drives TeraByte Unlimited Add Virtual Drive lt lt a 4 Click Next At the top of the window that appears next if necessary open the list of drives and select the external drive containing the image to restore or click the Windows Network Browse button to navigate to the drive you can use UNC paths Then select the name of the image file you want to restore which Image for Windows displays in the Filename box at the bottom of the window Image for Windows User Manual Page 89 of 227 Note If you select a differential or incremental backup to restore and Image for Windows is unable to locate all of the base images you will be prompted to locate the required backup file s i Image for Windows 2 86 Select the backup file to restore Fie Description WindowsNetworkBrowse E Data 35 2768 Free A Name Si C Win7 7 54GiB Free G D is Backup w0 0x1 2012 03 16 2236 TBI 10 M E Data 35 27GiB Free i
225. make the restored partition active only if no other partition is active and the target drive is HDO Update BOOT INI When you select this option Image for Windows will update all partition w entries in the boot ini file found in the restored location to point to itself This can be useful when restoring Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows 2003 operating systems to a new drive or location Write Changed Sectors Only Enable this option when restoring to write only the changed sectors to the target drive target will be read to compare Useful in cases where a large portion of the data is the same and it s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive e g restoring to SSD drive This option is unavailable if not supported by the drive Update Boot Partition This option updates any references to the restored partition in the active boot partition on the target drive This is useful for situations where the boot partition differs from the system partition However you typically Image for Windows User Manual Page 97 of 227 wouldn t want to use this option if you re creating a copy of an existing partition you want to keep unless the target drive will be independent of the original drive For this to be useful the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or part of the same copy or restore operation Note This option is not displayed when restoring a full drive image if the Automatic Boot Partiti
226. mand line options appear in the left column of Tables 1 to 11 You can display a list of currently set environment variables from the command line by typing the set command with no parameters To remove an environment variable type the set command the variable name and an equal sign followed by no value For example to clear the IFW variable type the following SET IFW Image for Windows File Path Variables You use a Set of special variables in the image file name path The variables are inserted in the file name path by using a special format of variablename The available variable names are YYYY four digit year YY two digit year MM two digit month DD two digit day of month DOY three digit day of year DOW three character day of week HHMM four digit hours and minutes HHMMSS six digit hours minutes and seconds and VER for the program version or any variable name created by using the savename option For Example the following variables would embed the 4 digit year 2 digit month and 2 digit day in the image file name Backup on YYYY MM DD The savename option is useful when scheduling ongoing differential backups that need to reference a full backup that is created using date based names as the example above shows For example if you setup the full backup schedule using the option savename lastfullobackup then you could reference it in the differential as shown below
227. mation TERABYTE User Note So that Image for Windows can run successfully the user account used must be a member of the Administrators group 8 Click OK A notice appears telling you the task has been added to the Windows Task Scheduler Image for Windows User Manual Page 208 of 227 Note Scheduled tasks can be managed using the Scheduled Tasks tab in program Settings Appendix E Restoring to a Smaller Drive or Partition Despite ever increasing hard drive sizes many users find themselves in situations requiring them to move to a smaller drive The difficulty level of this process depends on a number of factors including the method used and the details of the particular configuration This appendix presents several methods to accomplish this task and hopefully provide a trouble free transition Typical reasons to move to a smaller drive or partition include Moving the OS partition to a faster drive e g going from a 1TB hard drive toa 256GB SSD drive Segregating the OS from data e g splitting a single 950GB partition into a 100GB OS partition and a 850GB data partition Splitting a RAID 0 setup into single drives Migrating to a new physical system or to or from a virtual system Emergency recovery using parts on hand Testing recovery scenarios Procedure Summary The basic steps are as follows 1 Determine the minimum space required to restore the partition s If the source partition co
228. me window select Restore Automatic or Restore Manual If you choose Automatic Image for Windows attempts to choose the target drive and options automatically using information stored in the backup files If Image for Windows cannot identify the target drive and options or you don t accept the suggested target drive Image for Windows will use the Normal option and ask you to select the target drive and options Tip Remember that you can set the default values of many restore options by configuring the IFW INI file For example if you wish the Automatic Image for Windows User Manual Page 88 of 227 Restore to expand your partitions Scale to Fit you would include the Expand 1 option in the Restore_Defaults section If you choose Normal Image for Windows will ask you to select the target drive and options Note If you created a backup in Image for DOS or Image for Linux and restore using Image for Windows Image for Windows might not be able to use the Automatic option because Image for Windows might not be able to match the disk signature in the backup with the target disk on the machine to which you want to restore In this case Image for Windows uses the Normal option where you select the target drive and options 3 Click Next In the window that appears select the drive letter or device that contains the image you want to restore Note If the device containing the image is a device that I
229. mum Size Enter the maximum size for the IFW log file You can specify bytes Kibibytes KiB or Mebibytes MiB for the value Decimal values e g 2 5MiB are supported For example to limit the log file to 32KiB you can specify 32KiB or 32768 Data will be removed from the beginning of the log file as necessary to enforce the size Note If you specify a size smaller than the current log file size the new size will not take effect until the log is written to or IFW is closed The default maximum size is 1MiB Email Use this group of options to provide information necessary to have Image for Windows email the results of an operation This causes the email to be sent even if logging is disabled However if an operation never starts including a LogIn failure an email is not sent The Server From and To values are required The Port User Password and Subject values are optional If the Subject is net set Image for Windows determines the text for the subject The subject can be customized for success failure or both by inserting the characters brackets into the subject The text before is the success text the text after is for a failure Additionally you can include the place holder ec which is replaced by the error code otherwise Image for Windows appends the completion code text to the subject You can also specify a stored password configure in Settings or with the login option by using the following
230. mum disc reading speed that Image for Windows will use when reading disc media CD DVD BD during validation with n being a positive integer e g 2 4 16 etc This setting may be used to force a lower reading speed than that automatically used by the optical drive s firmware Slower reading speeds may Image for Windows User Manual Page 179 of 227 increase reliability nshould be a positive integer e g 2 4 16 etc This setting is only applicable when you are validating an image stored on disc media The maximum reading speed that is actually used is determined by whichever is ower The cdrs n value that you specify or the speed deemed appropriate by the drive s firmware according to the disc media in use For example if you are using media that is rated at 32X for reading the maximum reading speed will be no more than 32X regardless of the setting you choose here Similarly if you supply a value that is invalid for or beyond the drive s design limits the drive will automatically use the next highest speed supported by both the drive and the media in use DVD speeds are approximately 1 8 CD speeds so if you are using DVD discs multiply the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use here For example to obtain a maximum reading speed of 4X with a DVD use cdrs 32 since 8 x 4X 32 Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the Optimal speed setting iobs IOBS 1 Include this option to try
231. n Default if omitted Image for Windows does not ignore locking on restores nlrm n N A No lock restore mask For example to not attempt a lock on drive G you d use nirm 64 Likewise A would be nlrm 1 and G and A combined would be nlrm 65 Image for Windows User Manual Page 172 of 227 This is an advanced option and typically used with the noosn Default if omitted Image for Windows attempts to lock all required drives on restores ubi UpdateBootIni 1 This option only applies if a copy of boot ini exists in the root directory of the restored partition If enabled this option instructs Image for Windows to update all partition n references in the restored partition s boot ini file to accommodate a partition layout that differs from that of the original drive Image for Windows will set all partition based entries in the applicable boot ini to point to the restored partition but will not change file based entries This option has no effect when doing a full drive restore Default if omitted Image for Windows does not try to update the boot ini file ubp UpdateBootPart 1 This option updates any references to the restored partition in the active boot partition on the target drive This is useful for situations where the boot partition differs from the system partition However you typically wouldn t want to use this option if you re creating a copy of an existing partition you want to keep un
232. n t match that of the source drive the copy will abort if the Image for Windows User Manual Page 186 of 227 change is required and cannot be applied Default if omitted Image for Windows does not copy the first track fts n RFTS n Use this option to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive Image for Windows should copy Use 0 to indicate the entire track Default if omitted Image for Windows determines the number of tracks needed to copy stt Scale 1 For NTFS FAT FAT32 EXT 2 3 4 partitions use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to resize each copied partition proportionally so that each partition takes up the same relative amount of space on the target drive as it did on the source drive Unpartitioned free space that existed on the source drive at the time of the backup will still exist at the end of the target drive after Image for Windows completes the copy operation This option only applies when you copy an entire hard drive Default if omitted Image for Windows does not scale each copied partition Ix Expand 1 For NTFS FAT FAT32 EXT 2 3 4 partitions when copying to a target that is larger than the source partition use this parameter to have Image for Windows expand the partition after completing the copy operation This option is equivalent to the Scale to Fit option for fully copying drives Default if omitted Image for Windows will not expand the partiti
233. n AlignVal n Place under the HDx section Image for Windows User Manual Page 189 of 227 This option allows you to specify a custom partition alignment value for copied partition s For example to specify that partitions should be aligned on 2MiB boundaries use av 2M or AlignVal 2M Invalid sizes will be ignored This option overrides the other device alignment options Default if omitted This option is not set a custom alignment value will not be used ahs AlignEndHS 1 Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to force a copied partition s ending head and sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry Default if omitted The actual ending head and sector values are used ahst AlignHSOnTrunc 1 Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to set a copied partition s head and sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry when it is located outside the range of the current geometry Default if omitted The actual ending head and sector values are used mg UseMBRGeo 1 Place under the HDx section Set this parameter to tell Image for Windows to use the geometry based on the MBR entry of the first partition on the source drive Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the geometry of the target drive or the UseOrgGeo option og UseOrgGeo 1 Place under the HDx section Set this parameter to tell Image fo
234. n an external hard drive or on CD s or DVD s Then when you need to restore boot from a CD DVD USB flash drive UFD floppy diskette or other bootable media that has Image for DOS installed on it and use Image for DOS to perform the restore operation Across a Network You can use Image for Windows to create an image file to a mapped network drive or UNC path Using Image for DOS after creating a network capable boot media or Image for Linux you also can restore an image file from a mapped or mounted network drive You can use push technology not included to automatically start the back up or restore across a network You also can use Image for Windows from the Windows PE environment as described in the next bullet and in the section Using Image for Windows in BartPE on Page 86 to back up and restore from a network path In Windows PE or Windows RE TBWinPE is based on the Windows AIK ADK requires download from Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows 8 users can easily create TBWinRE boot media does not require downloading the Windows AIK ADK and add Image for Windows to the Windows Recovery Environment The TBWinRE files are automatically installed in the towinre sub folder of the Image for Windows installation folder and can be accessed there or from the Create Recovery Boot Disk shortcut in the Start menu When you boot your computer using this boot media you boot to a Windows preinstallation environment state where you c
235. n copying single partitions or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with existing partitions sectors located outside of the copied partition s are not wiped If a partition is resized during the copy the wiped area for that partition is the final size of the copied partition not the size of the source partition When copying a full drive or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with no existing partitions the entire drive is wiped including all gaps between any partitions Using this option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and copy to it in a single operation Default if omitted Image for Windows will not perform any wiping of unused sectors Image for Windows User Manual Page 188 of 227 att AlignToTarget 1 When copying an entire drive use this option to instruct Image for Windows to force alignment to the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive For example if the a2k option is also specified the restored drive will be aligned on 1MiB boundaries When copying a single partition specifying this option will instruct Image for Windows to not adjust the alignment 1MiB partition alignment will be used if the target has it already or not if it doesn t and a partition already exists Default if omitted The alignment used on the target drive will be determined automatically based on the source drive n2ka N A By default Image for Windows automatically uses 1MiB partition
236. n id This option can be used multiple times to specify multiple search paths e g when the images in the backup chain are not all stored in the same folder Examples commands should be on one line imagew r f E Backups Win8System Inc D sch E Backups sch E Backups Archive imagew r f wl 0x2 Images WinXP Drive Inc E sch wl 0x2 Images sch wl1 0x2 Images Full Default if omitted Image for Windows searches only the folder of the specified image for base images in the backup chain pw mypassword or pw my password N A Use this parameter to supply the password needed to decrypt a backup that you encrypted and or password protected when you created it If your password contains embedded spaces place quotation marks around it This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain base differential incrementals Default if omitted Image for Windows does not supply a password noej NoEject 1 Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to never automatically open the optical drive tray Default if omitted Image for Windows will automatically open the optical drive tray whenever a new disc is needed and when Image for Windows finishes restoring cdrs n CDReadSpeed n Use this setting to specify the maximum disc reading speed that Image for Windows will use when reading disc media CD DVD B
237. n the chain unusable Use del 1 or del to delete all the original image files Use del 2 to delete all except the base full image file Default if omitted The original image files will not be deleted N A The following backup parameters can optionally be used when combining images Image for Windows User Manual Page 196 of 227 comp select compression enc encryption and or password protection noej don t auto open optical drive tray iobs adjust I O performance desc_ specify image description bc backwards compatible md auto create target path Iv validate image max specify maximum file size log logging nash_ create hash file to speed up differential incremental backups sch search path s for base or incremental images pw _ specify password s For more information on the syntax of a specific option please refer to the mage for Windows Backup Options section on page 152 Troubleshooting If you should encounter any problems while running Image for Windows please visit our on line support page at http www terabyteunlimited com support image for windows htm The Image for Windows log file and the Windows event log can also provide useful information to resolve issues By default the log file IFW LOG is saved in the Image for Windows installation folder The Windows Event Viewer can be used to access the Image for Windows event log entries located in Wi
238. nd changes to the contents of any sector since the last backup Suppose that you move a file without changing its contents In a sector based backup the sector reallocation caused by moving the file is a change that will be included in the next incremental backup even though you didn t change the file itself Note Although defragmenting the file system does not change file content it can lead to many sector level changes because defragmenting files moves them from one disk location to another Incremental backups are hard to properly manage and tend to be troublesome during disaster recovery It is not uncommon to discover while trying to recover from a disaster that an incremental backup is either lost or damaged making all subsequent incremental backups worthless In addition if you accidentally restore incremental backups in the wrong order the problems you experience may not manifest themselves until some future date at which point recovery can become almost impossible Differential Backups Differential backups include only data that has changed since the most recent full backup was performed To use this method you make a full backup at an interval of your choice In between full backups you perform differential backups which include all data that has changed since the last full backup If you need to restore your entire system you need to restore the latest full backup followed by the latest differential backup unless the
239. nd line The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the options are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Backup_Defaults section Table 4 Image for Windows Optional Backup Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable pw mypassword or pw name N A Use this option to set a password for Image for Windows to use in conjunction with simple password protection or AES encryption Your password cannot exceed 128 characters and may contain upper lowercase letters numbers special characters spaces and non ASCII characters You can also specify a stored password created in Settings or by the login option by using the following format where name is the user for the login pw name If the password or name contains spaces surround it with quotation marks For example pw my password or pw john doe You must use this option if you also specify enc 1 or enc 3 described later in this table This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain base differential incrementals The first password specified will be used for the newly created image Default if omitted Image for Windows does not assign a password and the backup will be neither password protected nor encrypted sch
240. ndows Logs Application The following events and categories are logged Event ID 257 Information 258 Warning 259 Error Task Category None 0 Backup 1 Restore 2 Validate 3 Licensing 4 Copy 5 Use the evlogl1 command line parameter or the Event LogLevel INI file variable to adjust the level of logging By default Image for Windows will log errors warnings and start stop status Image for Windows User Manual Page 197 of 227 Appendix A Understanding the Types of Backups Many software packages create file based backups while Image for Windows creates a sector based backup This section describes both types of backups and their differences File Based Backup When you create a file based backup you copy files from one storage location to another using a third party software package the built in Microsoft backup utility or by dragging and dropping files and or folders using Windows Explorer Creating a file based backup is simple and you can backup or restore only certain files or folders But a file based backup it has drawbacks For example files that are in use may not be backed up And restoring a file based backup can be tricky Files in use cannot be restored If the required operating system environment and software is not installed and accessible you will first need to install it before you can restore any data Sector Based Backup A sector based backup also called imaging diffe
241. ndows environments When booted to a Windows PE build you can perform maintenance tasks or create or restore an image of your main Windows partition BartPE is a third party product and is not included with Image for Windows To learn more about BartPE or to download it please visit the BartPE Builder home page at www nu2 nu Partinfo A free utility you can use to view or export partition information Supports MBR EMBR and GPT disks TeraByte OS Deployment Tool Suite Professional A collection of specialized tools for IT professionals and power users These powerful tools in the right hands have many uses such as virus and rootkit removal and repair installation of software and drivers and much more Note This option is not available with the trial version of the program Image for DOS Recovery Disk Image for DOS is a standalone backup and restore utility that you can use to restore your Windows partition If you choose the Image for DOS Recovery Disk component you will be able to create a bootable CD DVD disc USB flash drive ISO file or floppy diskette that you can use to run Image for DOS Please note that your purchase of Image for Windows also includes Image for DOS at no additional charge Image for Linux Recovery Disk Image for Linux is a standalone backup and restore utility that you can use to restore your Windows partition If you choose the Image for Linux Recovery Disk component you
242. ntains more data than can fit on the new smaller partition it will be necessary to delete files or move files to a different drive When moving an entire drive to a smaller drive you will need to check space requirements for each partition on the source drive Check the file system for errors Run chkdsk onthe source partition s to check for file system errors Errors can cause compacting and resizing to fail Note You may want to run MEMTEST86 before chkdsk if RAM integrity is unknown 3 Compact or resize the partition s Image for Windows User Manual Page 209 of 227 Use the compact feature in the imaging programs to reduce the minimum required size or use Bootlt BM to resize the source partition smaller In either case use a size less than that of the new smaller partition When moving an entire drive to a smaller drive you may need to compact or resize multiple source partitions 4 Create a backup image of the drive or partition Once the source partition or drive is ready files moved partitions compacted file systems checked etc create a backup image 5 Restore the image to the new location When restoring specify the desired new smaller size Or if restoring a drive image use one of the scale options e g Scale to Fit If you are planning on copying the source partition s to the smaller drive you can skip Step 4 and perform the copy instead of Step 5 For more specific details on restoring to a smalle
243. ny for available hard drives 1EEE1394 Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller if any for available hard drives Virtual Drive Select this option if the backup resides on a virtual drive Use the screens that follow to navigate to and select the virtual drive containing the backup If you chose File CD DVD in Step 3 you can choose one of the following options ATAPI Select this option if your CD DVD BD drive is an ATAPI device and none of the other selections apply This is the most common option ASPI Select this option if your CD DVD BD drive will be accessed using an ASPI layer You must supply the ASPI driver for this option to work USB2 Select this option if your CD DVD BD drive is attached to a USB 2 controller 1EEE1394 Select this option if your CD DVD BD drive is attached to an IEEE 1394 controller If your USB device does not appear at first please try pressing the Esc key waiting a few seconds and selecting the USB or USB2 option again 5 Either the Restore From Select File Drive screen shown in the following figure or the Restore From Select Target Drive screen appears depending Image for Windows User Manual Page 76 of 227 on whether you are restoring from a hard drive or from CD DVD BD discs Select the target optical drive or hard drive Note If you select a hard drive the Restore From Select File Location on HD screen appears You
244. o assume the same ID as a partition being overwritten use the value zero for n Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the restored partition s original id gpt N A Instruct Image for Windows to create a GPT on the target drive Note that restoring first Image for Windows User Manual Page 168 of 227 track overrides this option This is mainly used with the clr option to ensure the full size of the drive that is greater than 2TiB is accessible You can also provide an option nomsr if the GPT to be created should not have a Microsoft Reserved Partition created on it While Image for Windows supports a GPT it does not currently officially support an EFI based system Default if omitted Image for Windows does not create a GPT on the drive rft RFT 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows restore the first track when it restores the partition Restoring the first track may also change the disk type MBR EMBR GPT of the destination drive if it doesn t match that of the source drive the restore will abort if the change is required and cannot be applied Default if omitted Image for Windows does not restore the first track fts n RFTS n Use this option to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive Image for Windows should restore Use 0 to indicate the entire track Default if omitted Image for Windows determines the number of tracks needed to restore stt
245. ocation where Image for DOS should look for the backup file you want to restore File Direct This option allows you to look for image file s in a folder ona hard drive that does not have a drive letter assigned to it by DOS File CD DVD This option allows you to look for image file s on a CD DVD BD disc Image for Windows User Manual Page 75 of 227 4 On the Restore From Select Drive Interface screen that appears select one of the following options These options refer to how Image for DOS should attempt to access the hard drive or CD DVD BD drive where your image is stored If you chose File Direct in Step 3 you can choose one of the following options BIOS Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS Please note that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply BIOS Direct Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS but then attempts to access it directly bypassing the BIOS This can sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is very poor In order to get the most out of this option when creating an image you should select a File Direct rather than File OS for the File Access Method of as the target for restoring the image Use BIOS direct when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and CD DVD BD drives at any time during the Restore process USB Examines the attached USB controller if a
246. og file a a te V Use Volume Label Email Output Disk ID to Command Line Server Port Automatic PHYLock RAM Mode Select ae Sequential Volume IDs F Disable Cancel Password Completion Alarm From V Resize with Caching Prefer Target Disk ID on Change is Disable Power Changes Subject Disable Priority Changes No Service Control V Show Entire Network V Bold Views Simple Operations Enable this option to have Image for Windows automatically handle most options for you You simply choose which physical drive you want to back up and if needed which drive you want to save to the target storage area is automatically maintained and files are deleted as needed when it runs out of free space Backup Restore Validate and Copy are available in Simple Operations mode Use New Windows MBR Windows Vista and later tied the kernel loader to the MBR code such that using previous MBR code may not allow Windows Vista or later to boot on certain machines Enable this option to have Image for Windows use the code base compatible with Windows Vista or later The new MBR code will Image for Windows User Manual Page 36 of 227 continue to boot older OSes with the exception of some rare configurations using Win9x on FAT32 Retain Failed Backups If you enable this option and a backup operation fails Image for Windows won t delete the files from the failed backup Accessible Check B
247. olithic Sparse IDE Creates a VMWare Sparse IDE virtual hard drive o VMDK Monolithic Sparse SCSI Creates a VMWare Sparse SCSI virtual hard drive Dynamic expanding virtual drives append data to the file as you add data to the virtual drive The file size starts small and grows as needed Fixed size virtual drives allocate data for the file when it s created and the file size does not change The file size will be the same as the virtual drive size e g a 40GiB virtual drive will use 40GiB of space Image for Windows User Manual Page 93 of 227 3 For Windows caching reasons it is highly recommended to create partitions within a VHDX file that are aligned on at least a 1MiB boundary That is either 2048 sectors for 512 byte sized sectors or 256 sectors for 4096 byte sized sectors 7 Click Next A message appears warning you that Image for Windows will overwrite the selected partition and all data currently in the selected partition will be lost Warning Image for Windows WARNING All data in the following partitions on HDO will be lost C Win7 Partition 02 38810 MiB HPFS NTFS Are you sure you want to continue 8 Click Yes In the window that appears set the options you want Image for Windows to use during the restore operation See the section Image for Windows Restore Options on Page 97 for an explanation of each option If you click No Image for Windows switc
248. ompleting the copy operation The other portions of the MBR i e the partition table disk signature etc will not be affected Otherwise Image for Windows will install the standard master boot code only when it appears that there is no existing boot code Copy Disk Signature This option applies when you copy a partition that had been assigned a drive letter within Windows If you select this option Image for Windows will copy the disk signature associated with the source partition If you don t select this option Image for Windows will use the disk signature already present in the MBR of the target drive if none exists Image for Windows will create one If you are copying a partition that had been assigned a drive letter in Windows and you wish to keep that drive letter assignment select this option For GPT drives the disk GUID will not be changed Copy First Track If you select this option Image for Windows will copy the first track of the source hard drive which includes the master boot code and the disk signature This enables you to restore the MBR EMBR Copying the first track may also change the disk type MBR EMBR GPT of the destination drive if it doesn t match that of the source drive the copy will abort if the change is required and cannot be applied Change GUID When copying to a GPT drive selecting this option will change the GUID of each partition copied Validate Byte for Byte If you select this op
249. on Default if omitted Image for Windows will notify you concerning the error and give you the option to continue or abort noosn n N A This option controls how the OS is notified of partition changes noosn 1 never send notification to OS about partition changes a reboot must be used or corruption could occur if existing partitions existed where restored partitions are located Most users will NOT want to use this option it s for very advanced users only noosn 2 defer the notification until all partitions are copied This option is safe for all to use Default if omitted The OS is notified of partition changes as each partition is copied ubi UpdateBootIni 1 This option only applies if a copy of boot ini exists in the root directory of the copied partition If enabled this option instructs Image for Windows to update all partition n references in the restored partition s boot ini file to accommodate a partition layout that differs from that of the original drive Image for Windows will set all partition based entries in the applicable boot ini to point to the copied partition but will not change file based entries This option has no effect when doing a full drive copy Default if omitted Image for Windows does not try to update the boot ini file wipe Wipe 1 This option will wipe zero out unused sectors in the copied partition s or drive depending on the type of copy performed Whe
250. on Image for DOS will ignore the error and continue Generally you should select this option only if you need to restore to a target drive that contains known bad sectors On some systems if you select this setting and Image for DOS encounters bad sectors there will be a significant delay as the internal retry recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector s In addition some systems may hang if the BIOS option is used to access the source drive In such cases try using the BIOS Direct option instead Disable Auto Eject This option prevents Image for DOS from automatically opening the optical drive tray If you don t select this option Image for DOS will open the drive tray whenever a disc is needed and at the completion of the restore operation Reboot When Completed Use this option to automatically reboot your computer after the restore finishes Shutdown When Completed Use this option to automatically shut down your computer after the restore finishes Log Results to File Select this option to make Image for DOS log the date and time it completes the restore operation Image for DOS saves the log as IFD LOG in the IMAGE EXE program directory To be able to save IFD LOG Image for DOS must be running from a writable medium such as a non write protected floppy diskette or UFD You can use the logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFD LOG x
251. on and free space will remain after Image for Windows completes the copy operation kf n KeepFree n Use this parameter if you also use either x or stt to specify the amount of space in mebibytes MiB that Image for Windows should leave free Default if omitted Image for Windows will fill the entire available area m FirstFit 1 Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to choose the target area automatically based on the first area of available free space large enough to accommodate the partition you want to copy Default if omitted You must explicitly specify the target area last LastFit 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows place the copied partition at the top of the last free block large enough e g restore to the end of the drive This option is valid only when copying a single partition and doesn t support resizing Default if omitted Image for Windows will copy the partition normally toward the start of the drive or free space area Image for Windows User Manual Page 187 of 227 vb PostValidate 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows check that each byte from the source drive was copied to the target drive properly Default if omitted Image for Windows does not validate the copied data err AllowErrors 1 Use this option to tell Image for Windows to ignore read write errors caused by bad sectors on the source or target drive during the copy operati
252. on but it is here for those that want the option of fast incremental backups As always don t let your incremental chain get too long or you ll eventually run out of file handles or memory including those limits that may apply to the restore environment Default if omitted PHYLock will not track writes usevss UseVSS 1 This option will cause Image for Windows to try using Microsoft s Volume Shadow Copy Services before using PHYLock on Windows 2003 or later If VSS is unable to be started then PHYLock may be used Note If novss is used no attempt will be made to use VSS even if this option is specified Default if omitted VSS is not used uftnb UseFilesToNotBackup 1 If you have configured the VSS FilesNotToBackup registry key you can use this option to have Image for Windows exclude those files folders when creating a backup image or copying a partition This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Exclusions will be applied in the same manner as if the exlist option were used Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g uftnb 0 When disabled and VSS is used files folders configured in the VSS FilesNotToBackup registry key will not be excluded by Image for Windows in the backup image or partition copy Files folders may still be excluded by VSS Default if omitted This option will be enabled uftns UseFilesToNotSnapshot 1 If you have configured the VSS FilesNotToSnapshot registr
253. on using this option allows the program to end with an error instead of prompting for the media Place this option just after the action parameter b r v to ensure this parameter is in effect for prompts that may occur in other command line options Default if omitted Media change requests will disable the uy or un options and you will need to respond to the request Jup N A Use this parameter when performing an unattended backup to tell Image for Windows to not prompt for a password if one is needed and not provided or is provided and is incorrect Instead the program will just exit with an error code Default if omitted Image for Windows will prompt for a password if one is needed asr 0 AutoScaleRestrict 0 Use this option to prevent small partitions from being automatically scaled when restoring or copying a full drive All partitions will be scaled normally per scaling option selected to fit the destination drive unless a minimum size is specified using the nos option Default if omitted Partitions with a size of 15GiB or 1 8 the drive size whichever is less or smaller will not be scaled when restoring a full drive image or copying a full drive This provides an automatic method to avoid scaling system reserved recovery and utility partitions to larger sizes when upgrading to a larger drive aubp 0 AutoUpdateBootPart 0 Use this option to prevent Image for Windows from automatically updating
254. on Update global option is enabled the default Write Standard MBR Code If you select this option Image for Windows will install standard master boot code to the Master Boot Record MBR after completing the restore operation The other portions of the MBR i e the partition table disk signature etc will not be affected Otherwise Image for Windows will install the standard master boot code only when it appears that there is no existing boot code Restore Disk Signature This option applies when you restore a partition that had been assigned a drive letter within Windows prior to being backed up If you select this option Image for Windows will restore the disk signature associated with the source partition If you don t select this option Image for Windows will use the disk signature already present in the MBR of the target drive if none exists Image for Windows will create one If you are restoring a partition that had been assigned a drive letter in Windows and you wish to keep that drive letter assignment select this option For GPT drives the disk GUID will not be changed Restore First Track Whenever you back up any partition Image for Windows also backs up the first track of the source hard drive If you select this option Image for Windows will restore the first track which includes the master boot code and the disk signature This enables you to restore the MBR EMBR Restoring the first track may also change the d
255. on is used noej NoEject 1 Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows never to automatically open the optical drive tray Default if omitted Image for Windows will automatically open the optical drive tray whenever a new disc is needed and at the completion of the backup operation cdrs n CDReadSpeed n Use this setting to specify the maximum disc reading speed that Image for Windows will use when reading disc media CD DVD BD during the validation phase of a backup operation with n being a positive integer e g 2 4 16 etc This setting may be used to force a lower reading speed than that automatically used by the optical drive s firmware Slower reading speeds may increase reliability nshould be a positive integer e g 2 4 16 etc Image for Windows User Manual Page 159 of 227 This setting is only applicable when you are backing up to disc media and you have also included either the v or vb option The maximum reading speed that is actually used is determined by whichever is lower The cdrs n value that you specify or the soeed deemed appropriate by the drive s firmware according to the disc media in use For example if you are using media that is rated at 32X for reading the maximum reading speed will be no more than 32X regardless of the setting you choose here Similarly if you supply a value that is invalid for or beyond the drive s design limits the drive will automatically use
256. ons at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing the Esc key Image for Windows will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel before it interrupts the current operation While the backup is in process you can change the power options and process priority options using the drop down boxes The default power option is Auto which will prompt to reboot when finished if a reboot is necessary If the selected power option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown Select Exit Only to have Image for Windows exit when finished The selected process priority will remain in effect until the program ends or is changed manually When Image for Windows finishes a window appears to inform you that Image for Windows created the backup successfully You can click Close Image for Windows User Manual Page 58 of 227 Restoring an Image File You can t restore an image to a partition or drive that is in use by your computer That is you cannot boot to a copy of Windows and then restore an image over that copy of Windows Boot Media and UEFI Systems Computer systems that come from the manufacturer with Windows 8 installed include a new BIOS interface known as the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface UEFI This new BIOS interface boots media differently than a traditional BIOS Microsoft also requires these systems to use a feature of UEFI called Secure Boot When Secure Boot is enab
257. option the TBICD2HD program is copied to your Windows folder which is in the system path by default Having TBICD2HD in the Windows folder allows you to run TBICD2HD easily from a command line regardless of the current directory Add Image for Windows to Context Menus This option allows you to right click on a drive in Explorer and select to create a backup of that partition The backup will be saved in the My Backups folder in the user s Documents folder It is recommended to move the backup image to another location after it has finished Start IFW Notify Automatically The IFW Notify system tray utility will be configured to run automatically when Windows starts The default configuration will provide notifications for backup and copy operations and warn if 30 days have passed since the last successful backup If this option is not selected and you wish to use IFW Notify you will need to run and configure the program manually Show TBOSDT Setup Wizard If you check this option the TBOSDT setup routine runs interactively allowing you to select the installation and Start menu folders and you see the installation progress If you don t check this option TROSDT setup will run silently in the background instead assuming you opted to install TBOSDT in Step 6 Create Image for DOS Recovery Disk This option runs the MakeDisk utility which helps you create a bootable Image for DOS USB flash drive CD DVD ISO image or floppy
258. or USB device performance is poor Default if omitted Image for Windows does not use this option err AllowErrors 1 Use this option to tell Image for Windows to ignore read write errors caused by bad sectors on the target drive during the restore operation This parameter does not apply to bad sectors on the source drive Default if omitted Image for Windows will notify you concerning the error and give you the option to continue or abort noosn n N A This option controls how the OS is notified of partition changes It s useful for full drive restores where your source and target drives are the same but you re sure the restored partitions won t overlap the source which will be deleted after the restore noosn 1 never send notification to OS about partition changes a reboot must be used or corruption could occur if existing partitions existed where restored partitions are located Most users will NOT want to use this option it s for very advanced users only noosn 2 defer the notification until all partitions are restored This option is safe for all to use Default if omitted The OS is notified of partition changes as each partition is restored irlm n N A Ignore restore locking mask For example to not care ignore lock failures on drive G you d use irlm 64 Likewise A would be irlm 1 and G and A combined would be irlm 65 This is an advanced option and typically used with the noos
259. ost as large as a full backup and take almost as much time to create Image for Windows User Manual Page 201 of 227 Appendix C Introduction to Hard Drive Storage All modern circa 2007 personal computers make use of at least one partitioned hard drive Knowing at least the basics of how hard drive partitioning and file systems work can help you understand how to work with TeraByte Unlimited imaging products The information about physical hard drives that follows is intended to be a broad overview to provide you with a general understanding of the hard drive The Physical Hard Drive Hard drives contain several round thin rigid disks called platters The rigidity of these platters serves as the basis for the terms hard disk and hard drive In the center of each platter is a hole by which the platter is mounted to a spindle The platters rotate around this spindle at high speed typically 5 400 to 10 000 rotations per minute or RPM Internal view of a hard drive in operation The arm appears blurred due to its rapid movement Photo courtesy of Michael Blessenohl The Logical Hard Drive Hard Drive Data Organization Data is organized on the platters of hard drives in the form of tracks and sectors which are established during manufacturing The tracks which exist on each side of each platter are concentric circles Sectors are defined by radial lines that go from the center point of the platter to the outer edge
260. owever if you wish to use DVD RW media it must be either brand new or fully blanked before being processed by MakeDisk To fully blank the DVD RW media use your burning software s full erase function The quick erase function will not work for this purpose Ifyou select a USB flash drive UFD you also must select the USB Mode to use Normal No Partition Partition or Partition Ex whichever works on your computer your computer s BIOS determines which option works Normal Raw Boot Image Creates a 1 44 MB floppy diskette image on the UFD Any additional space on the UFD beyond the floppy image size is not available for use Think of this option as if MakeDisk were formatting the UFD to be a 1 44 MB floppy If you were to view the UFD in Windows the drive would appear to be 1 44 MB even though it might have originally been a 4 GB drive and formatted as FAT No Partition FAT FAT32 Volume The entire UFD is configured as one big unpartitioned device If you were to view a 4 GB UFD created using this option in Windows you d see free space beyond the amount used by MakeDisk up to the size of the drive This free space is available to be used normally If the UFD is 4GB or smaller it s formatted as FAT Otherwise it s formatted as FAT32 Partition MBR FAT FAT32 Partition The entire UFD is used as a single bootable partition The computer s BIOS will usually detect this type of UFD as a
261. own reboot Backup Unused Sectors By default if the file system s you are backing up are one of the recognized types i e FAT FAT32 NTFS Ext2 3 4 ReiserFS or HSF Image for Windows will back up only used sectors If you select this option Image for Windows will include all used and unused sectors in the backup This option has no effect on partitions that do not contain a recognized file system such partitions will always be backed up in full regardless of this setting NOTE This option will cause Validate Byte for Byte to fail if VSS or PHYLock is used This option also causes Image for Windows to ignore the Omit Page File Data and Omit Hibernation Data options For entire drive backups this option causes a raw sector by sector backup and later restore of the entire drive without regard to any partitions or adjustments This option is not available when creating a differential or incremental backup Instead the new backup will use the setting as specified when the base image was created Disable TRIM Reduces the amount of caching required for the source drive on systems with TRIM enabled by disabling TRIM during the backup operation When TRIM is enabled the original contents of deleted sectors must be cached whereas a normal delete doesn t overwrite the sectors and instead just updates the directory entry Note If the operation doesn t complete due to reboot shutdown process forced to end etc TRIM will stay
262. own your computer after the restore finishes Log Results to File Select this option to make Image for DOS log the date and time it completes the restore operation Image for DOS saves the log as IFD LOG in the IMAGE EXE program directory To be able to save IFD LOG Image for DOS must be running from a writable medium such as a non write protected floppy diskette or UFD You can use the logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFD LOG x Change Volume SN Select this option to change the file system volume serial number of copied FAT FAT32 NTFS HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2 3 4 partitions First Track Sectors This text box allows you to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive should be restored If you enter AUTO in this box the tracks needed for the EMBR will be restored If you aren t sure type AUTO in this box Resize Partition Currently available only for FAT FAT32 NTFS and EXT 2 3 4 partitions you can use this text box to specify a new size for the restored partition bound by the Minimum and Maximum values specified by Image for DOS The units used here are mebibytes abbreviated MiB Please refer to the section titled Data Storage Size Unit Conventions at the beginning of this manual for more information New Name Enter the new volume name label for the restored partition If left blank the name will not be changed from
263. ows in TBWinRE see http www terabyteunlimited com kb article php 7id 050 To continue you can abort retry or ignore the problem Aborting will abort the backup Retry will attempt another lock enabling the Attempt Aggressive Lock on Retry option will invalidate all opened handles to the volume and try to force dismount it before locking this may result in lost data Ignore will attempt to force all open handles off the partition and continue with the backup without locking the partition Image for Windows User Manual Page 35 of 227 Understanding Options You can set program options for Image for Windows as well as options you want in effect during the backup Setting Image for Windows Program Options The options you can set for Image for Windows and for PHYLock are really one time settings That is review them and make changes only if necessary Once you establish a set of options that works for you you don t need to make changes each time you run Image for Windows General Settings Image for Windows Settings General Geometry PHYLock VSS Scheduled Tasks Password Simple Operations a Partition Selection CD Boot Image V Use New Windows MBR No Check Boxes Image for DOS Retain Failed Backups Individual Check Boxes Image for Linux z e ee Linked Check Boxes Custom CDBOOT INS V Automatic Boot Partition Update i i z V Automatic Restore Drive Search L
264. oxes Changes the checklist boxes to be compatible with screen readers Automatic Scaling Restrictions If this option is enabled Image for Windows will restrict the scaling of partitions which are the smaller of 15GiB or 1 8 the drive size Using this option is an easy way to avoid scaling system reserved recovery and utility partitions to larger sizes when upgrading to a larger drive Automatic Boot Partition Update If this option is enabled Image for Windows will automatically update the boot partition including an EFI system partition when a full drive image is restored When enabled the Update Boot Partition option will not be displayed when restoring a full drive image Automatic Restore Drive Search Select to enable Image for Windows to search for the destination drive using the disk signature or GUID when performing an automatic restore virtual drives will not be searched If a match isn t found or if this option is not enabled the drive number of the backed up drive will be used Use Volume Label If you enable this option Image for Windows will use the volume label instead of the name in the MPT for FAT FAT32 NTFS HPFS partition names regardless of whether an EMBR exists Output Disk ID to Command Line Select to enable command line output and relevant log entries to use the Disk ID NT Signature or GUID instead of drive numbers where the drive has an ID and the ID is unique Specifying the Disk ID ins
265. parameters in the Copy Defaults section Table 10 Image for Windows Optional Copy Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable raw RawMode 1 Image for Windows User Manual Page 183 of 227 Set this parameter to force Image for Windows to use raw mode which copies all sectors rather than just used sectors even for recognized file systems Default if omitted Image for Windows copies only used sectors backed up for recognized file systems and uses raw mode automatically for unrecognized file systems skp 0 SkipPageFile 0 Set this parameter to instruct Image for Windows to include the page files pagefile sys swapfile sys in the copy Default if omitted Image for Windows skips the page file data skh 0 SkipHiberFile 0 Set this parameter to instruct Image for Windows to include the hibernation file hiberfil sys in the copy Default if omitted Image for Windows skips the hibernation file data o N A Use this option to tell Image for Windows to overwrite the target without first prompting for confirmation Default if omitted Image for Windows prompts before overwriting the target clr N A Use this option to have Image for Windows clear the MBR and EMBR prior to copying Default if omitted Image for Windows does not clear the MBR and EMBR ro n N A Use this option to have Image for Windows reboot shutdown suspend or hibernate the system after copying The value
266. partition is highlighted the following options are available Information Click the Information button to view the details of the partition used space free space size needed to restore etc Compact Click the Compact button to compact the partition s file system FAT FAT32 and NTFS file systems are supported This option allows you to reduce the size required for a copy You will be prompted to confirm the compaction and then asked for the compaction value size in MiB For example if you have a 250GB partition that contains 50GB of data and requires 150GB of space to restore and you need to copy it to a 100GB partition you can compact the file system to under 100GB before copying it to the 100GB partition Image for Windows User Manual Page 107 of 227 4 Click Next In the window that appears select the partition drive or free space where you want to save the copy i Image for Windows 2 86 Select where to copy the partition s E Computer B E HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 _ i System Reserved 100 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 active H C Win7 38840 MiB HPFS NTFS 02 J Recovery 2047 MiB HPFS NTFS 03 ion fi 2 MiB Free Space 80 HD 4 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 _ I E Data 40957 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 i 2 MiB Free Space 80 HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E ar 40959 MiB Free Space 80 0 Virtual Drives 5 Click Next If the se
267. pears Check the appropriate boxes to create Desktop and or Quick Launch toolbar icons 5 Setup Image for Windows V2 a Lo Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing Image for Windows V2 then dick Next Create Quick Launch Icon Add PHYLock Setup to Program Group Show TBIView Setup Wizard Copy TBICD2HD to Windows Folder Add Image for Windows to Context Menus Start IFW Notify Automatically Show TBOSDT Setup Wizard ORROA Image for Windows User Manual Page 21 of 227 The following optional setup tasks are available Add PHYLock Setup to Program Group This option simply adds a shortcut to the Image for Windows menu under the Start menu that will allow you to uninstall reinstall PHYLock in the future If you selected the PHYLock option in Step 6 it will be installed regardless of what you select here Show TBIView Setup Wizard If you check this option the TBIView setup routine runs interactively allowing you to select the installation and Start menu folders and you see the installation progress If you don t check this option TBIView setup will run silently in the background instead assuming you opted to install TBIView in Step 6 Copy TBICD2HD to Windows Folder When you need to copy image files from a directly burned CD DVD to your hard drive you must use TBICD2HD By selecting this
268. peed of 2X with a DVD use cdws 16 since 8 x 2X 16 Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the Optimal speed setting max nMiB or max nGiB MaxFileSize nMiB or MaxFileSize nGiB Use this setting to specify the maximum file size of the image files that Image for Windows creates nshould be a positive integer e g 648 698 877 1003 etc Image for Windows can use either mebibytes or gibibytes so you must specify either MiB or GiB respectively Do not place any spaces between the number and the unit designation Decimal values are supported e g 2 5GiB The maximum file size is ultimately dictated by the file system used on the target drive Also some network redirectors limit file size to 2 GiB which can be a limiting factor for backup files stored on a network drive Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the maximum file size supported by the target file system raw RawMode 1 Set this parameter to force Image for Windows to use raw mode which backs up all sectors rather than just used sectors even for recognized file systems NOTE This option will cause Validate Byte for Byte to fail if VSS or PHYLock is used For entire drive backups this option causes a raw sector by sector backup and later restore of the entire drive without regard to any partitions or adjustments Note This option is not applicable when creating a differential or incremental backup Instead the new backup will use the s
269. pied partition ms n i N A Use this parameter to have Image for Windows move the partition table entry of the restored partition to a given slot in the MBR The value n is 0 to 3 This option is only applicable when restoring a single partition Default if omitted Image for Windows does not move the partition table of the restored partition embrid n i N A This parameter is used to set a specific ID value to the copied partition if an EMBR exists The ID is only used if not already in use by another partition To assume the same ID as a partition being overwritten use the value zero for n Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the copied partitions original id gpt N A Instruct Image for Windows to create a GPT on the target drive Note that restoring first track overrides this option This is mainly used with the clr option to ensure the full size of the drive that is greater than 2TiB is accessible You can also provide an option nomsr if the GPT to be created should not have a Microsoft Reserved Partition created on it While Image for Windows supports a GPT it does not currently officially support an EFI based system Default if omitted Image for Windows does not create a GPT on the drive rft RFT 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows copy the first track when it copies the partition Copying the first track may also change the disk type MBR EMBR GPT of the destination drive if it does
270. plug in was successfully installed Tip If you wish you may create edit the IFW INI file that resides in the plugin ifwv2 folder to apply custom settings each time you run Image for Windows under BartPE Editing the IFW INI file to include those settings stores them so that you don t have to enter them manually each time you run Image for Windows under BartPE Please refer to the section titled Image for Windows INI File for more information 7 Run Bart s PE Builder to create the BartPE disc or ISO file The Image for Windows plugin is enabled by default If you need a utility to burn an ISO file to disc try TeraByte Unlimited s free BurnCDCC utility You can install BurnCDCC as an optional component during Image for Windows setup or you can download it separately and install it If you are running Image for Windows in BartPE and an attached USB drive does not appear try closing and then restarting Image for Windows Using Image for Windows to Restore an Image To use Image for Windows to restore an image run Image for Windows in Windows or run it by booting your computer from the TBWinPE RE or BartPE media Then follow these steps 1 Double click the Image for Windows icon on your desktop or launch the program from its program group on the Start menu By default Image for Windows will automatically launch when TBWinPE RE is booted 2 Onthe Image for Windows Welco
271. pshot if locking fails The partition remains locked during the backup or copy operation Use VSS for Simple Operations Attempts to use VSS for the backup or copy when Simple Operations mode is enabled The Exclude Files To Not Backup and Exclude Files To Not Snapshot options are automatically used with Simple Operations when VSS is used Scheduled Tasks Image for Windows Settings General Geometry PHYLock VSS Scheduled Tasks Password Scheduled Tasks Name LastResult LastRun Next Run Trigger Image for Windows Taski 0 At 9 00 AM every day startinc 4 m b Add Manually Edit Delete Scheduled tasks are normally created by using the Schedule Backup button available via the backup wizard Editing or adding a task is applied to the task scheduler immediately Clicking cancel will remove tasks that were added Co _concet_ te Use the Scheduled Tasks tab to manage your scheduled tasks New tasks can be created manually or more easily by clicking the Schedule Backup button in the backup wizard Existing tasks can be edited or deleted by selecting them and clicking the appropriate button New manually added tasks will be removed not saved if the Cancel button is clicked Clicking the Task Scheduler button will open the Windows Task Scheduler Image for Windows User Manual Page 46 of 227 Password Settings Image for Windows Settings
272. ptions in a user created IFW INI file or using environment variables that you include on the command line or in a batch file You also can create a services ins file to control Windows services while working in Image for Windows The way you run Image for Windows affects the way Image for Windows processes advanced options If you run Image for Windows using the menu interface as described earlier in this manual Image for Windows sets all options using FW INI and you can customize IFW INT If you also want to set environment variables store them in a batch file that you run prior to running Image for Windows If you run Image for Windows from the command line as described in the section Running Image for Windows from the Command Line Image for Windows processes the command line switches and uses IFW INI to process global default options but ignores all other options in IFW INT and finally processes any environment variables you set So environment variables take precedence over FW INI The services ins file functions independently and Image for Windows will process it if it exists unless you include a switch to ignore services ins Image for Windows INI File To apply settings to Image for Windows you create a text file named IFW INI using a text editor such as Notepad The default location for this file is the Image for
273. r GlobalGeoMBRGeo is enabled This option only applies to interactive sessions it does not apply to command line restores To disable use geombrv 0 Default if omitted This option is enabled geoorg GlobalGeoOrgGeo 1 This option is the global equivalent to the individual Use Original Geometry override This option only applies to interactive sessions it does not apply to command line restores Default if omitted This option is disabled nos size NoScale size This option offers a way to prevent scaling of small partitions when scaling to a larger drive Partitions that are size in bytes or smaller will not be scaled For example 200m would not scale partitions that are 200MiB or smaller Note that the ini file value is not used on command line based operations Default if omitted All partitions are scaled when scaling is used ue N A This option instructs Image for Windows to pull both global and operation options from the IFW environment variable You must specify this option before the operation parameter on the command line For example if creating a backup imagew ue b Default if omitted Image for Windows will only pull global options from the IFW environment variable u N A Image for Windows User Manual Page 138 of 227 Use this option to cause Image for Windows to not display the completion message on success of the operation A message will still be displayed if success w
274. r those contained in a backup image file Output must be redirected to a file for viewing when using Image for Windows imagew exe Output can be redirected or viewed onscreen when using Image for Windows Console imagewc exe Example 1 imagew 1 d 0 stdout output txt In this example d 0 identifies hard drive 0 as the drive for which you want to list partitions and stdout output txt indicates Image for Windows will save the output to the file output txt Example 2 imagewc 1 all In this example a detailed report of all drives and partitions will be shown onscreen d n N A Specifies the drive for which you want to list the partitions where n the drive number Default if omitted All drives and partitions are listed opt N A List optical drives Includes drive number and name Hard drives will not be listed Default if omitted Optical drives are not listed fs N A Include free space available for each partition in listing This option has no affect when used with all or f Default if omitted The amount of free space is not listed all N A Specify to produce a more detailed report In addition to the basic information it includes e Hard drive BIOS Device number number of Sectors Sector Size and CHS values e Partition Start LBA End LBA FS ID PE Flag Free Sectors Used Sectors Last Used Sector MBR Entry number MBR End CHS and MBR Flag e When used
275. r Windows to use the original geometry of the source drive based on the environment being used to copy Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the geometry of the target drive c n c n Place under the HDx section Use this parameter in conjunction with h and s to manually specify the cylinder head and sector values for the target drive when you copy This parameter specifies the last cylinder and n is a number you supply Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the BIOS reported values of the drive h n h n Place under the HDx section Use this parameter in conjunction with c and s to manually specify the cylinder head and sector values for the target drive when you copy This parameter specifies the last Image for Windows User Manual Page 190 of 227 head and n is a number you supply Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the BIOS reported values of the drive s n s n Place under the HDx section Use this parameter in conjunction with c and h to manually specify the cylinder head and sector values for the target drive when you copy This parameter specifies the last sector and n is a number you supply Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the BIOS reported values of the drive rs n N A Use this parameter to resize a partition after copy nis the size in MiB s that you want to establish for the copied partition If you try to use this parameter in conjunction
276. r containing imagew exe imagewc exe or image exe 3 Run the command Image for Windows is used below imagew 1 all f e backups my backup gt output txt This will obtain all the partition information from the e backups my backup tbi image and save it to a file named output txt in the same folder as imagew exe Image for Windows User Manual Page 212 of 227 If using Image for Windows Console or Image for DOS you can view the output onscreen by not redirecting it For example imagewe 1 all f e backups my backup Using Image for Linux from the IFL Boot Media 1 Boot to the IFL CD If necessary mount the partition or network share that contains the backup image file Use the Mount Network Shares menu option or exit to the Command Prompt and use dpmount Select the Exit To Command Prompt menu option By default the current path is the one which contains imagel tbu Run the command imagel 1 all f mnt1 backups my backup gt output txt This will obtain all the partition information from the mnt1 backups my backup tbi image and save it to a file named output txt in the same folder as imagel Note The output txt file may contain escape code sequences as well as the partition data and may look strange in a text editor Output can also be viewed onscreen by not redirecting it imagel all f mntl backups my backup Use Shift PgUp and Shift PgDn to scroll through the output If the console buffer
277. r drive or partition as well as several example scenarios please continue reading Preparing for the Move Depending upon the specifics of the move and which method will be used it s possible extensive changes will be made to the existing data file systems resized or compacted data deleted programs uninstalled file systems repaired and so on It is recommended to create a backup image of the drive before proceeding if data safety or the ability to return to the present state is important to you As an example you may be moving from a 500GB Windows drive to a 128GB SSD You plan to delete many gigabytes of files you won t need and uninstall several large programs However you would also like to preserve the data on the 500GB drive One way to do this is to create a backup image of the drive and then make the desired changes A new backup image can then be created and restored to the SSD or the drive could be copied Once the SSD is ready for use the original drive image can be restored to the 500GB source drive returning it to its original state Understanding Partition Data Organization When you set up a hard drive you can create logical partitions A logical partition is simply a conceptual division on the hard drive You can use different file systems in different partitions and many users partition hard drives so that they can store different operating systems or segregate data on the same hard drive Formatting is the p
278. r otherwise permit access to any Confidential Information by any third party nor may you use any of the Confidential Information except strictly as part of the Evaluation Software in the form originally distributed by TeraByte 4 LIMITED WARRANTY THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ENTIRELY AS IS TERABYTE MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE ITS MERCHANTABILITY OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE TERABYTE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR SELECTING AND USING THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE AND THAT IF YOU USE THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE IMPROPERLY OR AGAINST INSTRUCTIONS YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR FILES SOFTWARE DATA OR BUSINESS THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS BORNE BY YOU THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THE AGREEMENT Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusions of an implied warranty so this disclaimer may not apply to you and you may have other legal rights that vary by jurisdiction 5 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY ANY LIABILITY OF TERABYTE WILL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE IN ADDITION INNO EVENT WILL TERABYTE NOR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE BE
279. r response time of other applications but at the cost of slowing down the backup Larger values throttle less often for a faster backup but at the cost of potentially slowing down other applications Setting this value to zero disables IO Throttling This option is relevant only if IO throttling is enabled pltr and or pltw Note The default timer in Windows has a resolution of 10ms This means option values like 5ms 12ms etc really mean something more like 10ms or 20ms Default if omitted PHYLock uses 100 for this setting Image for Windows User Manual Page 149 of 227 plwt PHYLockWriteTracking 1 Use this option to enable PHYLock to track writes so that incremental backups complete quickly without having to read and check all data for changes This option is part of PHYLock but not affected by the pldis option since it also applies using VSS The tracking is at a disk level so it only makes sense to use this on entire drive backups or where you only back up the same partitions continually and where the backups occur without a reboot Since PHYLock is close to the drive on the driver stack it is able to track writes that may bypass the filesystem however it cannot track writes that occur from any driver closer to the drive than itself as rare as that may be In addition it can only track writes that have been sent to the drive and would not detect changes that are cached Therefore it s not recommended to use this opti
280. ration you would like to perform at this time Operation Backup Full D Backup Changes Only Restore Automatic _ Restore Normal Validate TeraByte Unlimited O Copy Image for Windows User Manual Page 102 of 227 3 Click Next Image for Windows searches your network for resources that might contain backup files In the window that appears select the hard drive partition or virtual drive containing the image you want to validate i Image for Windows 2 86 Select where the backup file is located E Computer B C Windows Drives i C Win7 7 54GiB Free a 3 Entire Network CD DVD amp D SONY DVD RW AW Q170A H E HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 H E HD 4 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E Virtual Drives Note If you want to validate an image stored on a device that Image for Windows doesn display just highlight any Windows Drive and continue to the next step Image for Windows User Manual Page 103 of 227 4 Click Next In the window that appears select the file you want to validate At the top of the window open the list of drives and select the drive containing the image file you want to validate If you stored the file on a drive Image for Windows doesn t display or on network drive you can click the Windows Network Browse button to navigate to the drive After you select the file the name of the file appear
281. rd drive number w Windows device v Virtual drive Drive letter follows f N A Use this option to specify the target drive letter path and file name for a backup file It can also be used to connect to a multicast server f xAfilename f x mypath filename f x my path file name Or f d p ilename f d p mypath filename f d p my path filename f ntsig p mypath filename f GUID p mypath filename x is target drive letter mypath or my path is path to filename filename is target file name for image Or Specify target device partition path and file name d is target hard drive number p is target partition ID hex or decimal notation NT Disk Signature Follows GUID GPT Disk GUID mypath or my path is path to filename filename is target file name for image Device modifiers may be used as needed When used they must be placed after the f and before the target hard drive number w Windows device o Optical drive when you combine this option with the option mentioned above this option must come last Whether using drive letter or device partition you may specify any path desired Paths and or file names with imbedded spaces require the use of quotes Image for Windows User Manual Page 164 of 227 f server port sessionname password Used to connect to a multicasting server Use quotes if any of the values contain a
282. rds compatibility The att option should be used instead Default if omitted Alignment is automatically determined when restoring from the command line When a single partition is being restored and a2k is not used Image for Windows will use 1MiB partition alignment if the destination drive contains a 1MiB aligned partition or cylinder alignment if the drive contains a partition which is not 1MiB aligned Otherwise the alignment used is obtained from the image being restored aoe n AlignOnEnd n Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to align restored partitions at the end of a cylinder or when the Align2048 option is enabled end of a 1MiB boundary 2 Align on end by resizing 0 Disable align on end Default if omitted Normal alignment aoe 1 is used a2k Align2048 1 Place under the HDx section Use this option to instruct Image for Windows to align restored partitions based on 1MiB boundaries drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors If this option is enabled then you will normally want to enable the AlignEndHS ahs option and disable the AlignOnEnd aoe 0 option Default if omitted Alignment is automatically determined when restoring from the command line When a single partition is being restored and n2ka is not used Image for Windows will use 1MiB partition alignment if the destin
283. re supported For example logmax 32768 or logmax 32KiB Note If you specify a size smaller than the current log file size the new size will not take effect until the log is written to or Image for Windows is closed Default if omitted There is a 1MiB size limit on the log file logl n LogLevel n Causes less or more information to be output to the log file Use level 1 for errors only 2 for warnings 3 for status 4 for information 9 for debugging 10 for debugging with flush For example use log1 3 to specify status level logging If using 10 or higher the email option will be ignored emails will not be sent unless logging is disabled for the operation Default if omitted Informational level logging is performed ctf CreateTagFiles 1 Use this option to cause a file named T BTAG in the root of any copied or restored partition with information about what program was used and when it was restored or copied Note that if this option was enabled during a restore or copy then later backed up and restored with tagging disabled the old tag file remains on the partition In other words with this option off it doesn t delete tag files on restored or copied partitions Default if omitted No tag file is created of 8 OFlags 8 Setting this bit oriented option to 8 will cause single partition and multiple partition backups created to have the restore first track and write standard mbr code options restrict
284. ready present in the MBR of the target drive or if none exists Image for Windows will create one csig ChangeNTSig 1 When copying a full drive this option allows you to change the NT Signature copied to the target drive For target GPT drives the MBR NT Signature the GPT Disk GUID and the partition GUIDs will all be changed This can be useful if you plan on having both the original and copied hard drive in the same computer at the same time while running Windows otherwise Windows may detect the duplicate signature and modify it which may depending on the OS prevent the copied hard drive from booting properly When copying single or multiple partitions to a GPT drive this option will change the GUID of each partition copied To retain the existing signature used by the target drive also specify the csigut option Default if omitted Image for Windows will not change the copied disk signature drive GUIDs or partition GUIDs chgvsn ChgVoISN 1 Use this option to change the file system volume D serial number of copied FAT FAT32 NTFS HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2 3 4 partitions Default if omitted The file system volume ID serial number or UUID is not changed nvn name NewVolumeName name Use this option to specify the new volume name label for the copied partition If multiple partitions are being copied they will all be set to the specified name For example imagew copy sd w0 0x3 td w3
285. removable media is used this option prevents Image for Windows from automatically ejecting the removable media If you don t select this option Image for Windows will eject the media whenever new media is needed and at the completion of the restore operation Image for Windows User Manual Page 99 of 227 Log Results to File Select this option to make Image for Windows log the details of the restore operation By default Image for Windows saves the log as IFW LOG in the IMAGEW EXE program folder You can use program settings or the logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFw 1LoG Note that Image for Windows must be able to write to the specified folder to save the log Change Volume SN Select this option to change the file system volume serial number of copied FAT FAT32 NTFS HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2 3 4 partitions Reboot when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer reboot after completing the restore operation Shutdown when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer shut down after completing the restore operation Suspend when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer suspend sleep after completing the restore operation If a shutdown or reboot is required a shutdown is performed instead Hibernate when Completed Select this opt
286. restore this partition Please note that this value represents the data only operating systems may require an additional minimal amount of free space in order to function correctly To Check an Existing Image File from the Program Interface Note Version 2 74 or later is required to use this method 1 Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice and select to restore a backup 2 Proceed though the steps until you get to the screen where you select which partition s to restore 3 Highlight the partition to check and click the Information button in mage for Windows Image for DOS GUI and Image for Linux GUI or press F1 in Image for Windows Console Image for DOS and Image for Linux 4 Along with other details the number of MiB to Restore is displayed This is the minimum space required to restore this partition Please note that this value represents the data only operating systems may require an additional minimal amount of free space in order to function correctly To Check an Existing Image File from the Command line Run the TeraByte imaging program of your choice from the Command Prompt and specify the L ALL and F options Program output can be redirected to a file for easy reference Note Version 2 66 or later is required to use this method e Using Image for Windows Image for Windows Console or Image for DOS 1 If running in Windows start an Administrator Command Prompt 2 Change to the folde
287. rformed as follows Using Compact 1 Move 100GB of data files to a USB drive to bring the total used space down to around 70GB Boot to Image for Linux and select to create a backup 3 Select the 465GB Windows partition Make sure the 465GB Windows partition is highlighted and use the Compact option press F3 5 Specify a size of 100GB 6 After the compaction completes continue with creating the image of the partition Restore this image to the 128GB SSD specifying to resize it to use all available free space When restoring an OS partition any standard options necessary to ensure proper booting would also apply here Set Active Update BOOT INI Update Boot Partition etc just as with a normal restore Using Resize 1 Move 100GB of data files to a USB drive to bring the total used space down to around 70GB 2 Use a partitioning program such as Bootlt BM and resize the 465GB partition to 100GB 3 Boot to Image for Linux and select to create a backup Image for Windows User Manual Page 216 of 227 Select the 100GB Windows partition and create an image of it 5 Restore this image to the 128GB SSD specifying to resize it to use all available free space When restoring an OS partition any standard options necessary to ensure proper booting would also apply here Set Active Update BOOT INI Update Boot Partition etc just as with a normal restore Either method will accomplish the same results You m
288. ribution method not a type of software Because you can try shareware before you buy you can easily determine if a particular piece of software will fill your needs Also because the overhead is low prices are low Shareware has the ultimate money back guarantee if you don t use the product you don t pay for it Image for Windows User Manual Page 220 of 227 TeraByte Unlimited Trial Use License Agreement If you are using the software for evaluation or trial purposes then this license applies to you PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY By using copying transmitting distributing or installing all or any part of the TeraByte trial version computer software and documentation accompanying this License Agreement the Evaluation Software you agree to all of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement Please read the license terms and conditions below If you do not agree to all of the terms and conditions then do not use copy transmit distribute or install the trial version computer software and documentation accompanying this license Agreement TeraByte Inc dba TeraByte Unlimited TeraByte and or its suppliers own the Evaluation Software and its documentation which are protected under applicable copyright trade secrets and other laws Your rights and license to use the programs and the documentation are limited to the terms and subject to the conditions set forth below 1 LICENSE a TRIAL USE IN YO
289. rive is HDO Update BOOT INI When you select this option Image for DOS updates all partition w entries in the boot ini file found in the restored location to point to itself This can be useful when restoring Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows 2003 operating systems to a new drive or location Write Changed Sectors Only Enable this option when restoring to write only the changed sectors to the target drive target will be read to compare Useful in cases Image for Windows User Manual Page 82 of 227 where a large portion of the data is the same and it s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive e g restoring to SSD drive This option is unavailable if not supported by the drive Update Boot Partition This option updates any references to the restored partition in the active boot partition on the target drive This is useful for situations where the boot partition differs from the system partition However you typically wouldn t want to use this option if you re creating a copy of an existing partition you want to keep unless the target drive will be independent of the original drive For this to be useful the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or part of the same copy or restore operation Write Standard MBR Code If you select this option Image for DOS will install standard master boot code to the Master Boot Record MBR after completing the restore operation The ot
290. rocess that prepares a partition on the hard drive to accept data by creating an empty file system that is organized into clusters A cluster a logical grouping of contiguous sectors is the smallest logical unit of storage that you can allocate to hold a file s data Image for Windows User Manual Page 210 of 227 Table A depicts the layout of files within clusters on a hypothetical partition 44 clusters contain data with the last cluster in use the cluster closest to the end of the partition being located 75 into the partition The location of the last cluster at the time that you create an image determines the minimum amount of free space that must be available on the hard drive to which you intend to restore In this example assuming the partition size was 100GB you would not be able to restore it to a space smaller than 75GB Table B is a representation of the partition after being compacted It contains the same number of used clusters with no unused clusters interspersed As a result an image of this partition can be restored to a much smaller destination Compacting and resizing are both operations that allow you to relocate the data in the partition while maintaining its integrity Compacting leaves the partition size unchanged and moves the data so it fits the smaller specified size Resizing a partition smaller is similar to compacting but also reduces the size of the partition More information on this subject can
291. rs from file based backup because imaging operates on the entire partition including all files and the operating system itself This is the method of backup employed by Image for Windows When you create a sector based image as your backup you back up not only your data files but also the operating system in its entirety If you restore a sector based backup your computer returns to the state it was in when you created the image Image for Windows places all information on the target drive in the exact location where it appeared when you created the image In addition you can Restore a sector based backup even if the operating system isn t accessible effectively performing a bare metal restoration Restore individual files if you want using the free TBIView or TBIMount add ons Image for Windows User Manual Page 198 of 227 Appendix B Backup Strategies Whether you create file based backups or sector based backups you can choose between three different backup methods Full Backups Incremental Backups Differential Backups In this section you will find information that explains each of these backup methods The backup method you choose actually affects you most when you need to restore the backup some backups are easier to restore than others In addition to understanding backup methods it s also important to store your backup media in a safe secure location We strongly recommend that you store your ba
292. rupts the operation While the validation is in process you can change the power options and Image for Windows User Manual Page 104 of 227 process priority options using the drop down boxes If the selected power option is not supported by the system the next one will be used in the following order suspend hibernate shutdown Select Exit Only to have Image for Windows exit when finished The selected process priority will remain in effect until the program ends or is changed manually When Image for Windows finishes a window appears to inform you that Image for Windows successfully validated the selected backup You can click Close Understanding Validation Options There are several options available when you validate an image Log Results to File Select this option to make Image for Windows log the details of the validation operation Image for Windows saves the log as IFW LOG in the directory where you installed Image for Windows You can use program settings or the logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFw Loc Note that Image for Windows must be able to write to the specified folder to save the log Disable Media Ejection When removable media is used this option prevents Image for Windows from automatically ejecting the removable media If you don t select this option Image for Windows will eject the media whenever new media is needed and at the completion of the validate operation Sa
293. ry 2957d7c4 02c7 4205 afb5 f03434d8f37d1033 mspx mfr true See the following for an overview of Windows 7 Desktop Deployment http technet microsoft com en us library dd939988 WS 10 aspx See the following for more information on how to prepare for deployment for Windows 2003 Server What is Sysprep http technet2 microsoft com windowsserver en library c03a5469 ef71 4545 b970 ce2add5e715c1033 mspx mfr true Download for the Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Sysprep Tool http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid 93F20BB1 97AA 4356 8B43 9584B7E72556 amp displaylang en See the following for more information on how to prepare for deployment for Windows 2000 Download for the Microsoft Windows 2000 Sysprep Tool Image for Windows User Manual Page 119 of 227 http www microsoft com downloads details aspx familyid 0C4BFB06 2824 4D2B ABC1 0E2223133AFB amp displaylang en Using Sysprep to Duplicate Disks http www microsoft com technet prodtechnol windows2000serv reskit deploy dgcb ins izyl mspx mfr true See the following for more information on how to prepare for deployment for Windows NT Windows NT Workstation Deployment http www microsoft com technet archive ntwrkstn deploy depopt default mspx mfr true Image for Windows User Manual Page 120 of 227 Image for Windows Advanced Configuration Options Image for Windows offers a number of advanced configuration options You can set these o
294. s and restores a compressed or uncompressed snapshot of all sectors in the partition or volume both used and unused areas The snapshot backup created by Image for Windows is referred to as an image You can write the image backup to a set of files that you store in a different partition of the hard drive you are backing up on an external hard drive the recommended approach on a network drive or directly to most USB 2 IEEE 1394 ATAPI CD R RW DVD RW or BD drives Image for Windows can also work with drives that make use of ASPI drivers if you provide the appropriate DOS based driver When you create the image Image for Windows backs up the file system and files exactly as they are stored on the sectors of your hard drive at the time you make the backup effectively taking a snapshot of your hard drive when you create the image Image for Windows does not examine the files on your hard drive to make decisions about whether they should be backed up description of file based backups vs sector based backups Appendix B Backup Note See Appendix A Understanding the Types of Backups on Page 198 for a Strategies on Page 199 describes the types of backup strategies you can use and Image for Windows User Manual Page 7 of 227 the strategy you choose plays an important role when you need to restore a backup When you create a backup using Image for Windows you back up not only your data files but also the operating sys
295. s configured in UEFI mode To boot on these systems Secure Boot must be disabled and you must enable or use Legacy mode You can deal with this situation in several ways You can use Image for DOS or Image for Linux to restore an image to a Windows partition Image for Windows User Manual Page 59 of 227 Note When you purchase Image for Windows you automatically receive copies of Image for DOS and Image for Linux You can use TBWinPE or TBWinRE TBWinPE is based on the Windows AIK ADK requires download from Microsoft Windows 7 and Windows 8 users can easily create TBWinRE boot media does not require downloading the Windows AIK ADK and add Image for Windows to the Windows Recovery Environment The TBWinRE files are automatically installed in the towinre sub folder of the Image for Windows installation folder and can be accessed there or from the Create Recovery Boot Disk shortcut in the Start menu Tutorials for creating TBWinPE and TBWinRE boot media can be found on TeraByte s website You can use the free Bart PE and the PE Builder Plugin Installer included with Image for Windows to build a bootable Windows CD or DVD that also contains Image for Windows When you boot your computer using this CD DVD you boot to a Windows pre installation environment state where you can use Image for Windows to restore your backup A tutorial for creating a BartPE CD can be found on TeraByte
296. s finishes a window appears to inform you that Image for Windows created the copy successfully You can click Close Understanding Copy Options During the copy process you can set a variety of options These options will vary depending on whether you are copying an entire disk or a partition Options available when copying a partition are shown in the figure below Image for Windows User Manual Page 109 of 227 Image for Windows 2 98 lol feta Copy Options First Track Sectors Set Active A Update BOOT INI AUTO Write Changed Sectors Only Update Boot Partition Resize After Copy Write Standard MBR Code Min New Max Copy Disk Signature Copy First Track 31 M Change GUID New Name Validate Byte for Byte Copy Unused Sectors Wipe Target Unused Sectors TeraByte V Omit Page File Data Unlimited V Omit Hibernation Data Move to Original MBR Entry GPT Hidden From OS Assume Original HD Ignore 10 Errors V Log Results to File Change Volume SN B 40955 m Save Defaults show Command Set Active If you select this option Image for Windows will make the copied partition the active partition after completing the copy operation Otherwise Image for Windows will make the copied partition active only if no other partition is active and the target drive is HDO Update BOOT INI When you select this option Image for Windows will up
297. s in the Filename box at the bottom of the window Image for Windows 2 86 S Select the backup file to validate File Description Windows Network Browse E Data 35 27GiB Free X Name Size Modified Date Backup w0 0x1 2012 03 16 2236 TBI 3 16 2012 9 37 15 PM bs Win7 SRP 2012 03 16 TBI 10 MiB 3 16 2012 9 35 49 PM J di SRECYCLE BIN 3 15 2012 9 12 20 PM i M System Volume Information 11 10 2012 9 48 27 PM M Temp 9 27 2012 5 17 47 PM TeraByte Unlimited E TBI Filename 35 27GiB Free Backup w0 0x 1 2012 03 16 2236 TBI Eeva Nets 5 Click Next If you selected a differential or incremental backup to validate and Image for Windows is unable to locate all of the base images you will be prompted to locate the required backup file s Otherwise in the window that appears select the drive or partition s to validate Click Next Set the options you want Image for Windows to use while validating See the next section Understanding Validation Options on Page 105 for an explanation of these options 6 If you are validating from CD DVD BD discs make sure the first disc is inserted 7 Onthe Summary screen that appears select Start when you are ready to begin the validation process A progress bar appears on screen You can interrupt the operation at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing the Esc key Image for Windows will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel before it inter
298. s next depends on the target you chose in Step 5 If you selected CD DVD drive Image for Windows displays a window that suggests a filename If you selected a standard drive or network share the window shown below appears also suggesting a filename At the top of the window open the list of drives and select the drive on which Image for Windows should save the backup file If you want to store the backup on a drive not displayed by Image for Windows or a network drive you can click the Windows Network Browse button to navigate to the drive You can use UNC paths Note The suggested filename includes identifying information For example in the default name shown in the screen below w stands for Windows 0 represents the drive being backed up and YYYY MM DD HHMM represent the date in 4 digit year 2 digit month and 2 digit day format and time in 2 digit hour and minute format the backup started If you opt to back up a partition instead Image for Windows User Manual Page 33 of 227 of an entire drive the partition ID follows the drive number You can change the file name you don t need to include either the drive letter or the file name extension Image for Windows 2 86 crm Enter a filename for the backup File Description Windows Network Browse E Data 35 09GiB Free x Name Size Modified Date gt j 4 Win7 SRP 2012 03 16 TBI 10 MiB 3 16 201
299. s the default SMTP port If the subject is omitted Image for Windows determines the text for the subject The Image for Windows User Manual Page 130 of 227 subject can be customized for success failure or both by inserting the characters brackets into the subject The text before is the success text the text after is for a failure Additionally you can include the place holder ec which is replaced by the error code otherwise Image for Windows appends the completion code text to the subject You can also specify a stored password configure in Settings or with the login option by using the following format where name is the stored password name for the login name If SSL is required please see the KB article Sending Emails from Image for Windows to Servers that Require SSL for details Examples each example should be on one line Using default subject text email smtp mydomain com from mydomain com to mydomain com 25 login mydomain com password Using custom failure subject text email smtp mydomain com from mydomain com to mydomain com IFW Backup Failed Error ec 25 login mydomain com password Using custom success failure subject text default port and a stored password email smtp mydomain com from mydomain com to mydomain com IFW Backup Completed IFW Backup Failed Error ec login mydomain com loginname Using the default custom subject text as used b
300. s the backup in a second pass This setting is not applicable when performing a full backup This option must be used if the applicable full backup resides on removable media Default if omitted Image for Windows uses Single Pass mode identifying changes and backing up in one pass cdws n CDWriteSpeed n Use this setting to specify the maximum disc writing speed that Image for Windows will use when burning to disc media CD DVD BD and force a lower writing speed than that automatically used by the optical drive s firmware Slower writing speeds may increase Image for Windows User Manual Page 156 of 227 reliability nshould be a positive integer e g 2 4 16 etc The maximum writing speed that Image for Windows actually uses is determined by whichever is ower The cdws n value you specify or the speed deemed appropriate by the drive s firmware according to the disc media in use For example if you are using media that is rated at 8X for burning the maximum writing speed will be no more than 8X regardless of the setting you choose here Similarly if you supply a value that is beyond or invalid for the drive s design limits the drive will automatically use the next highest speed supported by both the drive and the media in use DVD speeds are approximately 1 8 CD speeds so if you are using DVD discs multiply the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use For example to obtain a maximum burning s
301. s to disable the global geometry settings and revert to using program defaults or drive specific overrides equivalent to versions prior to 2 52 This option only applies to interactive sessions it does not apply to command line restores Default if omitted Global geometry options are not disabled geoah GlobalGeoAlignHS 1 When this option is enabled Image for Windows will prevent problems with unaligned partitions being restored to systems with BIOS Auto Mode enabled Many newer systems use auto mode by default and some even don t have an option to turn it off This is equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align MBR Ending HS and Align MBR HS when Truncated This option only applies to interactive sessions it does not apply to command line restores To disable use geoah 0 Default if omitted This option is enabled geoa2k GlobalGeoAlign2K 1 This option provides a convenient way to enable 1MiB partition alignment for all drives drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors This is popular with users of SSD type drives It is the equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align on 1MiB Boundaries Align MBR Ending HS Align MBR HS when Truncated and disabling Align on End This option only applies to interactive sessions it does not apply to command line restores Default if omitted This option is disabled geoav n Global
302. se of accelerator keys An accelerator key is an individual letter that can be pressed or pressed in combination with the Alt key to select an option or a menu item In Image for DOS accelerator keys are highlighted in yellow or are underlined How you use an accelerator key depends on the current location of the cursor if it is in the same section of the screen as the desired accelerator key simply press the applicable letter i e the letter highlighted in yellow If the cursor is in any other section press and hold the Alt key and then press the applicable letter You can use the Esc key or click Back to move back to the previous menu If you use Esc Back in this manner Image for DOS remembers the selections you have already made throughout the Image for DOS session in the event that you return to the same screen Image for Windows User Manual Page 74 of 227 When using the GUI version of Image for DOS you can also use the mouse to select controls toggle options click buttons etc Restoring the Backup Insert your Image for DOS boot media into the appropriate drive or USB port and boot your computer Then follow these steps 1 Onthe Image for DOS Main Menu select Restore 2 On the Restore Select screen that appears select an option to determine how Image for DOS handles the selection of the target drive and options If you choose Automatic Image for DOS attempts to choose the target drive and options automatically
303. se the Restore Normal option you can use the Geometry Override settings to set alignment options as well as a specific Cylinder C Head H or Sector S to use for a given drive In addition to manually entering the values you can select the Use Original Geometry option to have Image for Windows use the geometry from the backup image Image for Windows Geometry Override Drive WO Use MBR Geometry Validate MBR Geometry Use Original Geometry Alignment V Align on End Align End by Resizing E Align on 1MiB Boundaries Align MBR Ending HS Align MBR HS when Truncated gosoesscesosesoesosoesesosssossososoesesosseseg F Save as Default You ll need the CHS option when the geometry assigned by Windows to a given drive does not match the BIOS geometry for the drive This situation occurs most often when you attach a hard drive from another machine to the USB port to restore the image C Last Cylinder 0 to 1023 H Last Head 0 to 254 Image for Windows User Manual Page 95 of 227 S Sectors per Track 1 to 63 Use MBR Geometry Use drive geometry based on the MBR entry of the first partition in the backup file This is useful when restoring to a drive on a machine separate from where the drive will ultimately be booted Validate MBR Geometry This option is used to ensure that the geometry from the MBR is aligned to known standards before accepting it for use It only applies when
304. ster boot code to the Master Boot Record MBR after completing the restore operation The other portions of the MBR i e the partition table disk signature etc will not be affected Otherwise Image for DOS will only install the standard master boot code when it appears that there is no existing boot code Wipe Unused Sectors This option will wipe zero out unused sectors on the restored drive When restoring a full drive the entire drive is wiped including all gaps between any partitions Using this option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and restore in a single operation Such as when deploying images to used systems Remove Gaps on Restore Select this option to remove any gaps free space between partitions Partitions will be restored adjacent to each other GPT Hidden From OS Use this option when restoring to a GPT drive to indicate that the operating system being restored will not see the destination drive as GPT when booted For example an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the OxEE placeholder partition is missing from the MBR Using this option prevents Image for DOS from using GPT specific fix up information on the drive after the restore Assume Original HD If you select this option which mainly applies to Linux partitions Image for DOS will keep references to the source hard drive number Image for Windows User Manual Page 80 of 227 intact within the partitions that have been restored to the target
305. tead of the drive number may be more stable especially for setup of scheduling backups since Windows may reorder drives at boot Automatic PHYLock RAM Mode Select Disables VSS and PHYLock Disk Mode forcing PHYLock RAM Mode when a Backup Unused Sectors or Copy Unused Sectors operation is being performed This option does not enable PHYLock if PHYLock is disabled Forcing RAM mode prevents a cache file from being created on the source partition s which may be desirable when backing up or copying unused sectors This option is enabled by default Sequential Volume IDs Changes the ID used for volumes to be numbered sequentially within the extended partition instead of using the normal ID which can appear random Disable Cancel Check this box to disable the Cancel button while Image for Windows backs up restores copies or validates Completion Alarm Checking this option will enable an audible alarm upon completion of an operation errors or when user interaction is required insert media etc Image for Windows User Manual Page 37 of 227 Resize with Caching Enable this option to reduce the time required to resize a partition by using a cache Prefer Target Disk ID on Change When enabled the Change Disk ID and GUIDs option will attempt to use the existing target drive ID GUID instead of generating a random ID This is useful when scheduling drive copy operations that use the csig option and use the disk ID
306. ted Windows 2008 R2 Vista 7 boot status is cleared phe n PageHiberClear n This option is used to control how the default page file pbagefile sys swap file swapfile sys and hibernation file hiberfil sys are treated after being restored or copied when they have been omitted from the backup copy The values are bit based and can be one of the following values or a combination of the following values added together 1 Clear first 4096 bytes of the page file 2 Truncate page file to zero 4 Clear 8192 bytes of hibernation file 8 Truncate hibernation file to zero 16 Clear the first 4096 bytes of the swap file 32 Truncate swapfile sys to zero For example to truncate the page file and clear the first 8192 bytes of the hibernation file use 6 Default if omitted The first 4096 bytes of the page file and swap file are cleared and the first 8192 bytes of the hibernation file is cleared Image for Windows User Manual Page 135 of 227 fnts 0 ForceNTSig 0 When Image for Windows notifies Windows of changed partitions see noosn option during copy or restore operations Windows may alter the disk signature if a disk with that signature already exists This can cause problems that will prevent the target disk from booting Windows properly To prevent this Image for Windows forces the disk signature to the restored copied value even if another disk with the same signature exists However if
307. tem in its entirety To understand the full impact of having an image backup suppose that you install a program to test it and discover it is not what you expected You attempt to uninstall it and it misbehaves Before you know it the fully functional well behaved computer you fondly remember from 30 minutes ago is gone and in its place you now have a devil child that won t even boot If you restore an image backup taken before you installed the errant program you effectively remove all traces of the program your computer returns to the state it was in before you installed the errant program and life goes on as if the errant program never existed on your hard drive To understand the technical details of how Image for Windows creates a sector based image see Appendix C Introduction to Hard Drive Storage on Page 202 After backing up with Image for Windows your computer is protected from crashes data loss hardware problems and malicious software i e viruses since you can restore the snapshot image whenever necessary You can view and extract individual files or folders from an image backup by using the free TBIView or TBIMount add ons which are included as part of the Image for Windows setup When you are ready to restore a backup file you typically don t use Image for Windows because you cannot restore a Windows image while you work in that instance of Windows So instead you can create an Image for DOS or an Image for Linux
308. the boot partition when a full drive image is restored or a drive is copied Default if omitted The boot partition including an EFI system partition will automatically be updated when a full drive image is restored or a drive is copied sar 0 SearchOnAutoRestore 0 When performing an automatic restore limits Image for Windows to using the drive number of the backed up drive to determine the destination drive Default if omitted Image for Windows will search for the destination drive when performing an automatic restore virtual drives will not be searched The search includes checking the disk signature or GUID drive size and empty drives If a match isn t found the drive number of the backed up drive will be used odid OutputDiskID 1 Use this option to enable command line output and relevant log entries to use the Disk ID NT Signature or GUID instead of drive numbers where the drive has an ID and the Image for Windows User Manual Page 140 of 227 ID is unique Specifying the Disk ID instead of the drive number may be more stable especially for setup of scheduling backups since Windows may reorder drives at boot Examples imagew b d 0xFD2C4742 0x1l E mybackup imagew b d 88AA61DC 7D91 4369 97FF 770EAE169F25 0x4 Default if omitted Drive numbers will be used in command line output ca CompletionAlarm 1 Use this option to enable an audible alarm upon comple
309. the file system volume serial number of copied FAT FAT32 NTFS HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2 3 4 partitions Image for Windows User Manual Page 112 of 227 Reboot When Completed Selecting this option tells Image for Windows to reboot the computer after completing the Copy operation Shutdown When Completed Selecting this option tells Image for Windows to shut down the computer after completing the Copy operation Suspend when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer suspend sleep after completing the restore operation If a shutdown or reboot is required a shutdown is performed instead Hibernate when Completed Select this option to have Image for Windows request that the computer hibernate after completing the restore operation If a shutdown or reboot is required a shutdown is performed instead If multiple power options are selected precedence is as follows suspend hibernate shutdown reboot Disable TRIM Reduces the amount of caching required for the source drive on systems with TRIM enabled by disabling TRIM during the copy operation When TRIM is enabled the original contents of deleted sectors must be cached whereas a normal delete doesn t overwrite the sectors and instead just updates the directory entry Note If the operation doesn t complete due to reboot shutdown process forced to end etc TRIM will stay disabled until enabled using the Windo
310. this option to control the amount of time the application delays after allowing pending IO to occur This value should be kept low otherwise the program could be doing nothing if the IO completes before this delay expires The only time you may want to extend it is if you expect multiple IO requests to occur that you want the application to wait for to prevent potential thrashing This option is relevant only if IO throttling is enabled pltr and or pltw Valid values are 0 through 20 Note The default timer in Windows has a resolution of 10ms This means option values like 5ms 12ms etc really mean something more like 10ms or 20ms Default if omitted PHYLock uses 0 for this setting plta n PHYLockThrottleAbort n Use this option to set the maximum amount of time to wait for other IO to complete before continuing even if more IO is pending This value will be adjusted to be a multiple rounded up of the Delay value above If set to zero then throttling is disabled This option is relevant only if IO throttling is enabled pltr and or pltw Valid values are 0 through 500 Note The default timer in Windows has a resolution of 10ms This means option values like 5ms 12ms etc really mean something more like 10ms or 20ms Default if omitted PHYLock uses 80 for this setting plti n PHYLockThrottlelnterval n Use this option to control how often the throttle may engage Lower values throttle more often for bette
311. this option will change the GUID of each partition restored To retain the existing signature used by the target drive also specify the csigut option Default if omitted Image for Windows will not change the restored disk signature drive GUIDs or partition GUIDs chgvsn ChgVoISN 1 Use this option to change the file system volume D serial number of restored FAT FAT32 NTFS HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2 3 4 partitions Default if omitted The file system volume ID serial number or UUID is not changed nvn name NewVolumeName name Use this option to specify the new volume name label for the restored partition If multiple partitions are being restored they will all be set to the specified name For example imagew r d w3 0x4 f H mybackup sp 0x4 nvn Win8 Copy Default if omitted The volume name will not be changed from its restored value Image for Windows User Manual Page 167 of 227 ohd UseOrgHDNum 1 Use this option to tell Image for Windows to keep references to the source hard drive number intact within the partition after Image for Windows has restored the partition to the target drive This option is primarily used for Linux partitions Default if omitted If the target drive number differs from that of the source drive Image for Windows will update applicable drive references residing within the restored partition to reflect the new hard drive number a SetActiv
312. tion Image for Windows will verify that every byte in the source location was written to the target location correctly ensuring 100 accuracy This option generally increases the processing time of the overall operation but we advise you use this option where maximum reliability is required Copy Unused Sectors By default Image for Windows copies only sectors in use If you select this option Image for Windows will copy all sectors on a partition or drive regardless of whether they contain data For entire drive copies this option causes a raw sector by sector backup and later restore of the entire drive without regard to any partitions or adjustments NOTE This option will cause Validate Byte for Byte to fail if PHYLock is used VSS is not allowed This option also causes Image for Windows to ignore the Omit Page File Data and Omit Hibernation Data options Wipe Target Unused Sectors This option will wipe zero out unused sectors in the copied partition s or drive depending on the type of copy performed When copying single partitions or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with existing partitions sectors located outside of the copied partition s are not wiped If a partition is resized during the copy the wiped area for that partition is the final size of the copied partition not the size of the source partition When copying a full drive or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with no existing partitions
313. tion of an operation errors or when user interaction is required insert media etc Default if omitted The alarm will not be used cr 0 CacheResize 0 Use this option to disable using a cache to reduce the time required to resize a partition Default if omitted Image for Windows will use a cache to speed up resizing a partition pruo 0 PHYLockRAMUnusedOp 0 Specify to allow VSS or PHYLock Disk Mode to remain enabled when backing up unused sectors Default if omitted Image for Windows disables VSS and PHYLock Disk Mode forcing PHYLock RAM Mode when a Backup Unused Sectors or Copy Unused Sectors operation is being performed This option does not enable PHYLock if PHYLock is disabled Forcing RAM mode prevents a cache file from being created on the source partition s which may be desirable when backing up or copying unused sectors dwdl 0 DisableWinDL 0 Note This option applies only when Image for Windows is used outside of Windows e g in TBWinRE or TBWinPE Use this option to disable searching for Windows drive letters when using the Simple Operations mode of Image for Windows Drive letters will not be displayed when selecting a drive Default if omitted Image for Windows will search for the drive letter mapping of the first Windows installation found e00 0 EjectOpticalOnly 0 Use this option to allow Image for Windows to eject both optical and other removable media e g USB flash drives Z
314. tition in the backup image when restoring a backup Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the geometry of the target drive or the UseOrgGeo option mgv UseValidMBRGeoOnly 1 Place under the HDx section This option is used to ensure that the geometry from the MBR on the original system is aligned to known standards before accepting it for use It only applies when mg UseMBRGeo is used Default if omitted This option is disabled og UseOrgGeo 1 Place under the HDx section Set this parameter to tell Image for Windows to use when restoring a backup the original geometry of the source drive based on the environment used when the backup was created Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the geometry of the target drive c n c n Place under the HDx section Use this parameter in conjunction with h and s to manually specify the cylinder head and sector values for the target drive when you restore a backup image This parameter specifies the last cylinder and n is anumber you supply Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the BIOS reported values of the drive h n h n Place under the HDx section Use this parameter in conjunction with c and s to manually specify the cylinder head and sector values for the target drive when you restore a backup image This parameter specifies the last head and n is a number you supply Default if omitted Image for Windows uses the BlOS report
315. tition or volume that is in use based on a point in time 5 Click Next The Select Destination Location window appears To change the default folder where Image for Windows will be installed click Browse and navigate to the appropriate folder Otherwise continue to the next step 5 Setup Image for Windows V2 Select Destination Location Where should Image for Windows V2 be installed hb Setup wil install Image for Windows V2 into the following folder To continue dick Next If you would like to select a different folder click Browse Program Files x86 TeraByte Unlimited Image for Windows V2 At least 11 3 MB of free disk space is required Image for Windows User Manual Page 18 of 227 6 Click Next The Select Components window appears From the drop down menu you can choose Full Installation as shown in the figure below Compact Installation or Custom Installation j5 Setup Image for Windows V2 SE Select Components Which components should be installed Select the components you want to install dear the components you do not want to install Click Next when you are ready to continue Full installation Image for Windows V PHYLock Allows backup while using Windows V TBIView View and extract files V IFW Notify System tray utility V TBICD2HD Copy files from directly burned discs V BINGBURN Burn image files to CD DVD BD discs V BurnCDCC Burn ISO f
316. to improve I O performance in cases where network or USB device performance is poor Default if omitted Image for Windows does not use this option mp MultiPass 1 Use this parameter to tell Image for Windows to use Multi Pass mode when validating a differential or incremental backup In Multi Pass mode Image for Windows validates the full backup in one pass and the differential backup in a second pass or incrementals in multiple passes This setting is not applicable when validating a full backup This option must be used if the applicable full backup resides on removable media Default if omitted Image for Windows uses Single Pass mode validating in one pass base N A Note Beginning with Image for Windows 2 78 this parameter is optional when validating a differential or incremental backup and should normally be omitted Instead use the sch option if it s necessary to specify the location of any of the base images Use when validating a differential or incremental backup to identify the base backup Image for Windows should use to validate the backup base x bkup x is source drive letter base x mypath bkup mypath or my path is path to bkup base x my path bkup bkup is name of existing base backup Or omit file extension r oase d p bkup Or f Specify source device partition path and base d p mypath bkup fle name pase d p my path bkup Image for Windows User Manual Page 180 of 227
317. u want to perform a backup The second parameter d 0 identifies the drive to back up This example backs up Hard Drive 0 The next part of that parameter 0x01 identifies the partition to back up on the selected hard drive this example backs up the first partition If you want to back up the entire drive simply omit the part of the parameter that identifies the partition The third parameter identifies that you are about to specify where to store the backup file 1 identifies the target drive and 0x01 again identifies the partition in this example Image for Windows will store the backup file on Hard Drive 1 in the partition with ID 0x01 The information after 0x01 represents the path and file name where you want to store the backup file In this example Image for Windows stores the backup file in mypath filename To list partitions on a hard drive you would type imagew 1 d 0 gt filename txt In this example d 0 identifies hard drive 0 as the drive for which you want to list partitions and gt filename txt indicates the file where Image for Windows will write the list of partitions In Table 1 you find the global parameters you can set for Image for Windows regardless of the action you set backup restore validate or copy Image for Windows User Manual Page 125 of 227 Important Note It s highly recommended that all global and device options be set before any other options This is because certain
318. ual Also please remember the following If your computer contains more than one CD DVD BD drive and you are restoring using Image for DOS from a CD DVD BD disc please make sure that you insert your Image for DOS bootable disc in one drive and no other optical drive contains a bootable disc Image for Windows User Manual Page 60 of 227 Since the hard drive order during the boot process may be different than it is while Windows is running you may need to press a key when prompted to access the Image for DOS menu that will allow you to select the appropriate drive from which to restore Restoring a Backup with Image for DOS You run Image for DOS by creating bootable media CD DVD disc USB flash drive floppy diskette that contains the Image for DOS program Then you simply use the Image for DOS boot media to boot the computer containing the drive that you want to back up or restore Once the computer boots Image for DOS automatically starts Creating a Bootable Image for DOS Disc In Windows you can create the Image for DOS boot media using the MakeDisk utility MakeDisk is included when you download Image for DOS or Image for Windows Follow these steps to use the MakeDisk utility to create the Image for DOS boot media Note These steps assume that you installed the optional Image for DOS Recovery Disk component during Image for Windows setup if you did not re run the Image for Windows setup an
319. uded with Windows 98 2000 2003 XP Vista Windows 7 and Windows 8 What follows is a step by step tutorial for using this feature 1 If creating a normal mode backup run Image for Windows and select Backup Full Be sure to select the source drive destination drive and backup options you wish to have applied to the scheduled task If creating a Simple Operations mode backup you would just need to select the source drive and destination drive if not auto detected Refer to the section titled Creating Backups with Image for Windows if you need more information on how to run a backup NOTE Scheduled tasks that used network mapped drive letters may not run properly because the mapped drive letter might not exist when the program is launched or due to permission issues To prevent this problem use the UNC instead of a mapped drive letter 2 Onthe Backup Options screen shown below normal mode backup or Summary screen Simple Operations mode click the Schedule Backup button Image for Windows x64 2 86 Backup Options V Validate st T Validate Bytefor Byte 7 Encrypt Data Enhanced Speed A V Omit Page File Data V Omit Hibemation Data J Ignore IO Errors Password Disable Media Ejection Log Results to File Reboot when Completed i 7 Shutdown when Completed Fie Size Suspend when Completed TeraByte Backup Unused Sectors Unlimited Disable TRIM Sp
320. unning Image for Windows from the Command Line on Page 124 Validating Backups with Image for Windows You can use Image for Windows to validate backups at the time you create them and also before you restore a backup You also can validate a backup at any time using the instructions provided below When you validate a backup Image for Windows performs internal consistency checks on the backup file s helping to ensure that the backup will be reliable if you need to restore from it Image for Windows User Manual Page 101 of 227 Tip You should consider validating your backup images using your Image for DOS Image for Linux or BartPE WinPE recovery media to make sure that you can see your backups while working in the recovery environment Validating a Backup When you use the steps that follow to validate a backup Image for Windows performs a standard validation not the byte for byte validation that provides a more intense scrutiny of a backup file You can perform a byte for byte validation only as part of a backup operation See the section Setting Backup Options on Page 48 for details on a byte for byte validation 1 Double click the Image for Windows icon on your desktop or launch the program from its program group on the Start menu 2 Onthe Image for Windows Welcome window select Validate 4 Image for Windows 2 86 SE Welcome to Image for Windows Please choose which ope
321. up Default if omitted Image for Windows uses Single File Set mode and creates a single image regardless of the number of individual partitions you back up desc my description N A Use this option to specify the descriptive text you want Image for Windows to associate with the backup up to 511 characters note that command line length limits may not allow a maximum length description If your descriptive text includes spaces surround it with quotation marks desc my description Default if omitted Image for Windows doesn t add any descriptive text purge n Purge n Image for Windows User Manual Page 160 of 227 This option is used to delete image files that are n days old or older You can think of it as the number of days to retain images It s only used during a command line backup and only processes the target folder of the current file specified using the f option Care should be taken as the purge occurs prior to the backup As an option you can have the purge take place only after a successful backup by providing n as a negative number E g purge 15 Default if omitted No image files are purged filetpl filename FileTemplate filename Sets the default file name offered during interactive use of the program during backup operations Default if omitted The program uses a name that includes the device partitions and date nt NoTRIM 1 Reduces the amount of caching r
322. up correctly ensuring 100 accuracy This option generally doubles the processing time of the overall backup operation but is advisable to use where maximum reliability is required You can but do not need to select the Validate option if you select the Validate Byte for Byte option Encrypt Data If you select this option Image for Windows will encrypt the backup file s with 256 bit AES encryption prior to saving them to the target medium If you select the Encrypt Data option you must also supply a password in the Password text boxes Enter the password in the first Password text box and retype it in the second Password text box for verification Image for Windows User Manual Page 48 of 227 Note If you create a backup with the Encrypt Data option you will be required to supply the password whenever you wish to validate the backup restore it or open it in TBIView or TBIMount If you lose and or forget the password you won be able to open or restore from the backup TeraByte Unlimited has no way of recovering data from an encrypted backup with an unknown password If the Encrypt Data setting is not enabled the Password text boxes have no effect and may be left blank The maximum password length is 128 characters Passwords are case sensitive and may contain upper case letters lower case letters numbers special characters spaces and non ASCII characters Note You may want to avoid using special language ch
323. upport it Multi Pass This option appears when you make a differential or incremental backup Backup Change Only and tells Image for Windows to use a two step process to make the differential backup In the first step Image for Windows looks for what it needs to back up and then in the second step Image for Windows makes the actual backup In some situations using the Multi Pass option can make the operation go faster Compression Select Standard or one of the Enhanced options to compress the backup files that Image for Windows creates With compression Image for Windows typically produces smaller image files but takes longer to back up If you select None Image for Windows creates your backup more quickly but produces larger image file s The attainable compression ratio depends on a number of factors including the number size and content of the files on the source partition and the level of file fragmentation on the source partition Typically Image for Windows compresses backup files 40 60 However if the source partition primarily contains files that do not compress well such as media files like MP3 JPG and AVI or archive files like 7Z RAR and ZIP the compression ratio will be much lower The Enhanced Size A B C options correspond to the Enhanced Normal Slower Slowest options used by version 2 71 and earlier These options provide greater compression but the backups may take considerably longer The Enhance
324. using information stored in the backup files If Image for DOS cannot identify the target drive and options or you don t accept the suggested target drive Image for DOS will use the Normal option and ask you to select the target drive and options Tip Remember that you set the default values of many restore options when creating the boot media Enter the INI file options on the appropriate page of the MakeDisk wizard For example if you wish the Automatic Restore to expand your partitions Scale to Fit you would include the Expand 1 option in the Restore_Defaults section See Creating the Image for DOS Boot Media in the Image for DOS manual Note Performing an automatic partial restore will not change the disk type MBR EMBR GPT of the destination drive if it doesn t match the type of the source drive If you choose Normal Image for DOS will ask you to select the target drive and options Note If you created a backup in Image for Linux or Image for Windows and restore using Image for DOS Image for DOS might not be able to use the Automatic option because Image for DOS might not be able to match the disk signature in the backup with the target disk on the machine to which you want to restore In this case Image for DOS uses the Normal option where you select the target drive and options 3 From the Restore From Select File Access Method screen that appears select between the following options which refer to the l
325. validate it later Follow these steps Note For detailed steps to validate a backup see the section Validating Backups with Image for Windows on Page 101 1 Boot your computer using the Image for DOS boot media you can create using the steps in the section QuickStart Creating a Recovery Boot Disc or using the BartPE boot disk you can create using the steps in the section Using Image for Windows in BartPE On the Image for Windows main menu select Validate Select the source location that contains the backup image file that you want to validate Select the backup image file you want to validate Image for Windows User Manual Page 13 of 227 5 Set validation options For details on available validation options see the section Understanding Validation Options on Page 105 Obtaining Image for Windows You can download either the unregistered trial version or the registered version of Image for Windows Ifyou have not purchased Image for Windows click here to download the unregistered trial version If you have purchased Image for Windows click here to display a product download form for obtaining the registered version You will need to provide your name email address and Image for Windows order number Note If you use the trial version of Image for Windows to make a backup you will be able to restore that image for 30 days After that time you will only be ab
326. values are supported raw A plain raw file that is allocated as the virtual drive vhdd VirtualPC Dynamic Expanding file vhdf VirtualPC Fixed file vhdxd Hyper V Virtual Hard Disk Dynamic Expanding file vhdxf Hyper V Virtual Hard Disk Fixed file vhdxd4 Hyper V Virtual Hard Disk Dynamic Expanding file with a sector size of 4KiB 4096 bytes vhdxf4 Hyper V Virtual Hard Disk Fixed file with a sector size of 4KiB 4096 bytes vmdk VMWare Monolithic Sparse IDE file vmdks VMWare Monolithic Sparse SCSI file For Windows caching reasons it is highly recommended to create partitions within a VHDxX file that are aligned on at least a 1MiB boundary That is either 2048 sectors for 512 byte sized sectors or 256 sectors for 4096 byte sized sectors You can use a special form of the command line parameter v0 to remove all references to any defined virtual drives This special format is useful when you want to override any Vn references that may exist in an INI file Default if omitted No virtual drives are defined kfb KeepFailedBackups 1 Prevents Image for Windows from deleting the backup created when the backup operation fails Default if omitted The backup created is deleted if the backup failed recover Attempts to access image files that are reported as incomplete and suppresses the data loss message clearing of boot sector data on a failed validation during restore If you obtain an image stream corrupt message
327. ve the copy will also be bootable Note Unless you copy an entire drive Image for Windows does not automatically set the copy as the active boot partition unless you select the Set Active option To create a copy of a partition or drive follow these steps 1 Double click the Image for Windows icon on your desktop or launch the program from its program group on the Start menu 2 On the Image for Windows Welcome window select Copy 4 Image for Windows 2 86 Welcome to Image for Windows Please choose which operation you would like to perform at this time Operation Backup Full Backup Changes Only Restore Automatic Restore Normal Validate TeraByte Unlimited Copy Image for Windows User Manual Page 106 of 227 3 Click Next In the window that appears select the hard drive partition or virtual drive that you want to copy 4 Image for Windows 2 86 S Select the hard drive or partitions to copy va m Computer i gt HD 0 MBR 40960 MiB FD2C4742 a System Reserved 100 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 active WW C Win7 38810 MiB HPFS NTFS 02 a Recovery 2047 MiB HPFS NTFS 03 6 HD 1 MBR 40960 MiB 22E5A9B7 DO E Data 40957 MiB HPFS NTFS 01 gt HD 2 MBR 40960 MiB 75E4938E O Virtual Drives TeraByte Unlimited Add Virtual Drive Information Compact When a
328. ve Defaults Click this button to save the settings you establish In the future Image for Windows will display these settings automatically Show Command Click this button to display the information you would type at a command prompt to start a validation with the options you selected as you displayed the various windows in Image for Windows You can use this information to create a batch file or TBScript TBS file that runs Image for Windows by selecting the Save to File option The command line can be edited before being saved For details on using Image for Windows from a command prompt see the section Running Image for Windows from the Command Line on Page 124 Copying Partitions or Drives with Image for Windows You can use the Copy operation to place an copy of the contents of one partition or drive on another partition or drive Suppose for example that you have a hard drive all set up and configured just the way you want it and you want to clone that setup so that you can place it in another computer You can use the Copy operation Copying a Partition or Drive Using the Copy operation Image for Windows makes a sector by sector copy of the used areas of the partition or drive you select and places that copy on the partition or drive you designate overwriting any information stored on the target location If Image for Windows User Manual Page 105 of 227 the partition or drive you copy is a bootable partition or dri
329. ve number and physical location on the drive that you backed up unless you override this setting If the target partition was a volume and no extended partition now exists at the original location Image for Windows will attempt to create the original extended partition If Image for Windows cannot create the extended partition Image for Windows will restore the image as a primary partition If the target partition was originally a primary partition and an extended partition now exists at that location Image for Windows will restore the image as a volume If an existing partition or volume occupies the same starting location as the partition you want to restore Image for Windows will display a warning message before overwriting the partition or volume You can suppress this warning message as described in Table 5 d d p d is the target hard drive number p is the target partition or volume ID hex or decimal notation depending on whether you are referring to a partition or a volume Use this parameter only if you are restoring an individual partition d ntsig d GUID D is the target drive letter NT Disk Signature Follows or omit Image for Windows User Manual Page 163 of 227 signature to match on original signature GUID GPT Disk GUID or omit GUID to match on original GUID You can use device modifiers as needed When you use them you must place them after the d and before the target ha
330. when its volume name is in a format unsupported by VSS The partition will be backed up or copied in the unlocked state If any changes are made to the data on the partition during the operation and a byte for byte validation vb is used the validation will fail Note This option can be used for Simple Operations mode procedures Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g vssiuv 0 When disabled unsupported volumes will not be ignored Image for Windows may revert to using PHYLock This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Default if omitted This option will be enabled vssfd VSSForceDismount 1 Use this option to have Image for Windows attempt to force dismount an unsupported volume when attempting to lock it vssluv if the lock fails All open handles on the volume will be invalidated which may result in data loss This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Default if omitted Image for Windows will not attempt to force dismount unsupported volumes vsscm VSSComponentMode 1 Use this option to only enable VSS components that are needed based on the partitions being backed up or copied Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g vsscm 0 When disabled all components are used automatically This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Default if omitted This option will be enabled Image for Windows User Manual Page 151 of 227 vssifn VSSIf
331. will be able to create a bootable CD DVD disc USB flash drive ISO file or floppy diskette that you can use to run Image for Linux Please note that your purchase of Image for Windows also includes Image for Linux at no additional charge This option is only available if you re using the installer that includes Image for Linux Image for UEFI Recovery Disk Image for UEFI is a standalone backup and restore utility that you can use to restore your Windows partition If you choose the Image for UEFI Recovery Disk component you will be able to create a bootable CD DVD disc USB flash drive ISO file or floppy diskette that you can use to run Image for UEFI Please note that your purchase of Image for Windows also includes Image for UEFI at no additional charge This option is only available if you re using the installer that includes Image for UEFI 7 Click Next and the Select Start Menu Folder window appears You can click Browse to change the Start Menu Folder or you can accept the default Image for Windows User Manual Page 20 of 227 43 Setup Image for Windows V2 oli Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts i Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the following Start Menu folder To continue dick Next If you would like to select a different folder dick Browse TeraByte Unlimited Image for Windows Browse 8 Click Next and the Select Additional Tasks window ap
332. with f additional Data Info is listed the base image filename is listed for differential incremental images and the file exclusion list if any is listed Default if omitted Only the basic information is listed Image for Windows User Manual Page 193 of 227 f N A List backup image drive and partition information from the specified backup image file Use with all to obtain more details It is not necessary to include the TBI extension with the file name The image file description is listed if one exists When all is not specified no drive information is displayed and the partition information is limited to the name size file system and ID Example imagew l all f e backups my backup stdout output txt In this example detailed drive and partition information from the backup image file e backups my backup tbi will be saved in output txt Default if omitted Physical drives and partitions are listed Image for Windows Combine Options Table 12 lists the Combine parameters you can use when you run Image for Windows from the command line Table 12 Image for Windows Combine Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable combine N A Use this command to combine a differential or incremental images of a backup chain into a single image file The newly created image is a full image and can be used as the base image for future differential or incremental backups The f parameter is
333. with x the Expand option x overrides rs Default if omitted Image for Windows copies the partition without resizing nt NoTRIM 1 Reduces the amount of caching required for the source drive on systems with TRIM enabled by disabling TRIM during the copy operation When TRIM is enabled the original contents of deleted sectors must be cached whereas a normal delete doesn t overwrite the sectors and instead just updates the directory entry Note If the operation doesn t complete due to reboot shutdown process forced to end etc TRIM will stay disabled until enabled using the Windows fsutil program fsutil behavior set DisableDeleteNotify 0 If IFW completes the operation even with errors reported TRIM will be properly reset to the enabled state Default if omitted Image for Windows does not disable TRIM during a copy operation exlist filename N A IMPORTANT NOTE This option is used at your own risk Be aware that you re not getting a complete image copy This option allows you to specify a file which contains a list of paths and or files to exclude when copying The file must be ANSI text and located on the local file system FAT FAT32 and NTFS file systems are supported the option will be ignored for other file systems The data of the excluded files is not copied the files will either be deleted or truncated depending on the options selected Note that even though excluded the data will still affect t
334. ws User Manual Page 70 of 227 9 Click Next and the License Product Key screen appears If you own a licensed copy of Image for DOS supply your product key ws MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 License Image for DOS Product Key 0000 1 111 2222 lt lt Previous f Next gt gt Cancel Copyright 2004 2011 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved 10 Click Next and the Select Target screen appears Choose the target that MakeDisk should use to create the bootable Image for DOS media g MakeDisk Image for DOS V2 Select Target ISO File Floppy gl A 3 Floppy B CD DVD S es CD Speed Optimal ar lt lt Previous Enin Cancel Copyright 2004 2011 TeraByte Inc All Rights Reserved Image for Windows User Manual Page 71 of 227 You can create a bootable USB flash drive with MakeDisk as long as the USB flash drive is not larger than 64 GB If you choose the ISO File option also supply an ISO file name in the box provided If you choose the 3 1 2 Floppy option be sure to insert a floppy diskette before proceeding The entire contents of this floppy diskette will be overwritten If you choose the CD DVD option be sure to insert a writable CD or DVD disc before proceeding The entire contents of this disc will be overwritten MakeDisk can automatically overwrite CD RW and DVD RW media H
335. ws Vista or later The new MBR code will continue to boot older OSes with the exception of some rare configurations using Win9x on FAT32 Specify this option to have Image for Windows use Windows 9x compatible MBR code Note that the ini file value is not used on command line based operations Default if omitted MBR code compatible with Vista Windows 7 or later is used vn filename cr type sizeinmb Vn filename cr type sizeinmb Makes a virtual drive available for use by Image for Windows nis a number between 0 and 9 you use to represent any of 10 virtual drives If you reuse a number Image for Windows will replace the prior definition for that virtual drive You must define the virtual device before using it with other command line parameters using one of two formats a Just include the filename of an existing virtual drive Example vO0 D VHD Files myvirtualdisk vhd b Provide additional parameters after the filename using commas as shown in the sample above and the following example v2 myvirtualdisk vmdk r vmdks 2048 For the cr parameter use the letter C or the letter R C Tells Image for Windows to create a new virtual drive if one doesn t exist R Tells Image for Windows to recreate the virtual drive even if one already exists Note that Image for Windows gives no warning before recreating a virtual drive Image for Windows User Manual Page 127 of 227 For the type parameter the following
336. ws fsutil program fsutil behavior set DisableDeleteNotify 0 If IFW completes the operation even with errors reported TRIM will be properly reset to the enabled state Scale to Target This option only applies to full drive copies If you use this option when copying a disk or partition Image for Windows copies the image proportionally to the target drive For example suppose that you want to copy a 250 GB hard drive to a 500 GB hard drive If you use this option you allow Image for Windows to double the size of the copy This option only works for FAT FAT32 NTFS and EXT 2 3 4 file systems and has no effect on copies made to hard drives using other file systems You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to Fit option If you inadvertently enable both options Scale to Fit will take precedence Scale to Fit This option only applies to full drive copies On FAT FAT32 NTFS EXT 2 3 4 file systems selecting this option will make Image for Windows assume that the size of the original hard drive is based on the location of the end of the last partition Image for Windows then applies the same scaling to the target hard drive If any unpartitioned space exists at the end of the source drive that unpartitioned space won t exist on the target drive after you restore your image This option has no effect on copies made to hard drives using other file systems You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to Target
337. ws to choose the target area automatically based on the first area of available free space large enough to accommodate the partition you want to restore When restoring or copying a full drive this parameter will remove any gaps free space between partitions restoring them adjacent to each other Default if omitted You must explicitly specify the target area when restoring a partition Gaps may exist between restored partitions when restoring or copying a full drive last LastFit 1 Use this parameter to have Image for Windows place the restored partition at the top of the last free block large enough e g restore to the end of the drive This option is valid only when restoring a single partition and doesn t support resizing Default if omitted Image for Windows will restore the partition normally toward the start of the drive or free space area rp n N A This option is intended for use when restoring multiple partitions from a backup image located on a recovery partition to the drive containing the recovery partition All partitions on the drive except the partition indicated by the ID value n will be deleted prior to the restore Typically this option would be used with x rft or x m rft Scaling of the restored partitions will operate as if a full drive image were being restored This option is only supported when restoring multiple partitions and cannot be used when restoring an entire drive image Due to the
338. y key you can use this option to have Image for Windows exclude those files folders when creating a backup image or copying a partition This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Exclusions will be applied in the same manner as if the exlist option were used Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g uftns 0 When disabled and VSS is used files folders configured in the VSS FilesNotToSnapshot registry key will not be excluded by Image for Windows in the backup image or partition copy Files folders may still be excluded by VSS Image for Windows User Manual Page 150 of 227 Default if omitted This option will be enabled vssluv VSSLockUnsupportedVolumes 1 Use this option to have Image for Windows attempt to lock a partition when its volume name is in a format unsupported by VSS If the lock fails and vssiuv is used the partition will be ignored Otherwise PHYLock may be used Note If Image for Windows is unable to obtain a lock you can also specify the vssfd option to attempt a forced dismount of the volume Using a value of 0 will disable this option e g vssluv 0 When disabled an attempt will not be made to lock unsupported volumes Image for Windows may revert to using PHYLock This option applies only when VSS is enabled and used Default if omitted This option will be enabled VSsiuv VSSIgnoreUnsupportedVolumes 1 Use this option to have Image for Windows ignore a partition
339. y password N A Use this parameter to supply the password needed to decrypt a backup that you encrypted and or password protected when you created it If your password contains embedded spaces place quotation marks around it This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain base differential incrementals Default if omitted Image for Windows does not supply a password log 0 SaveLog 0 Image for Windows User Manual Page 181 of 227 Disables logging Default if omitted Image for Windows logs during a validate operation Image for Windows Copy Options In Table 9 you find the command line options that you can set to use Image for Windows to make a copy of a partition or drive The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable In some instances both forms of the parameter are available in other cases only one is available When one form of an option isn t available N A appears To set up an INI file place these parameters in the Copy_Defaults section Table 9 Image for Windows Required Copy Parameters Command Line Option INI Variable copy N A Use this option to indicate that you want to perform a copy sd N A Use this option to identify the source hard drive and partition For most users the partition ID will be a number from 1 through 4 For partition IDs of 9 or below you can use a Single digit in pl
340. y version 2 71 and earlier email smtp mydomain com from mydomain com to mydomain com 25 login mydomain com password email smtp mydomain com from mydomain com to mydomain com IFW Operation Result ec 25 login mydomain com password Note Emails will not be sent if using Log Level 10 10g1 10 or higher unless logging is disabled Default if omitted No email is sent po n PerfOpt n This option is used to manually control various file caching options of Image for Windows and Windows itself The settings can have an impact on the overall performance and can be used to fix some driver based problems as well The values for n can be as follows and combined using addition 0 Disable default cache settings used by Image for Windows 1 Disable Windows cache on writes 2 Disable Windows cache on reads 16 Disable write cache on removable drives only applies if 257 not used 32 Use smallest alignment applies to 2 59 or later 64 Image for Windows will determine if write cache is disabled on Image for Windows User Manual Page 131 of 227 removable drives only applies if 257 not used 257 Use Windows cache on writes 514 Use Windows cache on reads 1028 Use small write cache on backup 2056 Use small write cache on restore For example users saving to an iPod may get an error Unable to write data to file This can be fixed by using the po 0 option
341. ytes Microsoft Windows on the other hand defines GB in base binary where 1 GB 1 024 MB 2 bytes 1 073 741 824 bytes Because of the confusion that can result when these different data storage size unit conventions are each referred to as gigabytes the gibibyte along with the kibibyte mebibyte etc was established in 1998 by the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC A gibibyte abbreviated GiB is a base binary unit so 1 GiB 2 bytes 1 073 741 824 bytes The IEC retained the term gigabyte to refer to base decimal where 1 GB 10 bytes 1 000 000 000 bytes Image for Windows and this document will follow IEC recommendations and will thus use the terms megabyte MB gigabyte GB etc to refer to base decimal and mebibytes MiB gibibytes GiB etc to refer to base binary So when you read about the data storage size convention used by Windows the units will appear as mebibytes MiB or gibibytes GiB even though Windows itself refers to the units as megabytes MB or gigabytes GB How Image for Windows Works Image for Windows is a backup program that is designed to function in the Windows operating environment but can back up a hard disk containing any type of operating system Image for Windows protects your system by creating a compressed or uncompressed snapshot of all used areas of your FAT FAT32 NTFS Ext2 3 4 ReiserFS or HSF partition or volume For other file systems it save

Image for Windows User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents